Fiat - 500e - Owners Manual - 2016 - 2016

® 2016 OWNER’S MANUAL FIAT 500e I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. WARNING! Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. Copyright © 2015 FCA US LLC I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 3 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 4 5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 5 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 6 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 7 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 8 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 9 10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 10 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: INTRODUCTION CONTENTS 䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .7 䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .8 䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 1 4 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION The enclosed Warranty Information lists the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers: Congratulations on selecting your new FIAT 500e. Be assured that your 500e represents an elegant marriage of • The Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for technology and Italian styling that is as good for the maintaining its validity environment as is fun to drive! • The range of additional services available to FCA US This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assisLLC customers tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it you with the operation, understanding and maintenance should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencof your 500e. It is supplemented by Warranty Informaing and remain with the vehicle when sold. tion, and various customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Follow- When it comes to service, remember that your authorized ing the instructions and recommendations in this manual dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techwill help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about vehicle. your satisfaction. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: INTRODUCTION 5 Consult the following table for a description of the Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner’s Manual: contains the information you desire. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment. The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 1 6 INTRODUCTION I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: INTRODUCTION 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 1 This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through the windshield. This number also appears engraved on the right front door sill under the sill scuff plate, on an adhesive label applied to the right door opening on the B-Pillar, on the vehicle registration and title. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Vehicle Identification Number 8 INTRODUCTION VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS WARNING! Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Stamped VIN Location NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 CONTENTS 䡵 IMPORTANT VEHICLE INFORMATION . . . . . . .12 ▫ Smartphone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 ▫ High Voltage Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 䡵 ELECTRIC SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . .19 䡵 500e ELECTRIC VEHICLE FEATURES . . . . . . . . .14 ▫ Audible Pedestrian Warning System . . . . . . . . .14 ▫ Single-Speed Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 ▫ Auto Park. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 ▫ E-Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 ▫ Climate Control (HVAC System) . . . . . . . . . . . .16 ▫ Electric Air Conditioning Compressor . . . . . . . .16 ▫ Electric Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 ▫ Level 1 Charging (120V — Requires NEMA 5–15 Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 ▫ Level 2 Charging (240V — Requires A 40 Amp Circuit Breaker Or Greater) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 ▫ Charge Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 ▫ Vehicle Charge Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 ▫ EVSE Operation And Status Information . . . . . .22 ▫ Charging The High Voltage Battery. . . . . . . . . .24 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Vehicle Charge Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 ▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .36 䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 ▫ Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st Press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 ▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 ▫ Locking Doors With A Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 ▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 ▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 ▫ To Arm The System: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 ▫ To Disarm The System: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 ▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .37 ▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .37 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 ▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .41 ▫ Auto Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 䡵 POWER WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 ▫ Power Window Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 ▫ Auto-Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .44 ▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 ▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 ▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 ▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 ▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .57 ▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 ▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IMPORTANT VEHICLE INFORMATION Your 500e operates entirely on electricity stored in the high voltage battery. Unlike a conventional vehicle or Hybrid there is no internal combustion engine. Battery Electric Vehicles have unique operating characteristics that you should become familiar with to ensure you are getting the optimal performance from your vehicle. High Voltage Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a Lithium-ion high voltage battery that is used to power the electric powertrain systems and the 12 volt vehicle electrical system. 1 — High Voltage Cables The high voltage battery is located under the vehicle. The 2 — High Voltage Battery high voltage battery is maintenance free and designed to last for the life of the vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Lithium-ion batteries provide the following benefits: • Lithium-ion batteries are much lighter than other types of rechargeable batteries of the same size. • Lithium-ion batteries hold their charge; they only lose approximately 3 percent of their charge per month. WARNING! Never try to remove the high voltage service disconnect. The high voltage service disconnect is used when your vehicle requires service by a trained technician at an authorized dealer. Failure to follow this warning can cause severe burns or electrical shock that may result in serious injury or death. • Lithium-ion batteries have no memory, which means that you do not have to completely discharge them before recharging, as with some other batteries. Disposal of the High Voltage Battery • Lithium-ion batteries can be recharged and discharged Your vehicle’s high voltage battery is designed to last the thousands of times. life of your vehicle. See your authorized dealer for information on the disposal of the battery if it should High Voltage Battery Service Disconnect require replacement. The high voltage battery service disconnect is located under the rear passenger seat lower cushion. If your General Information vehicle requires, service see your authorized dealer. The vehicle is also equipped with a Battery Management System that is designed to: • Ensure safe operation I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • Maximize driving range 500e ELECTRIC VEHICLE FEATURES • Maximize the life expectancy of the high voltage Understanding the unique characteristics of your 500e will help ensure maximum performance and the best battery driving range from your vehicle. NOTE: Your 500e is equipped with two electrical systems; a 12 • During vehicle start up and shut down a clicking noise Volt system that is used to power the conventional may be heard from within the vehicle. When the electrical system and a high voltage system, which is ignition key is turned to the on position, the high used to drive the wheels through a single-speed transvoltage battery contactors inside the battery are closed mission as well as other high voltage system compoto make the stored electricity inside available for nents. vehicle use. The clicking noise observed is the sound of these contactors as they open and close and is normal Your 500e operates differently then a traditional vehicle or Hybrid vehicle. Here are some of the main differences: operation for your 500e. • The operating temperature range of the high voltage battery is -22 °F to 122 °F (-30 °C to 50 °C). If it is attempted to operate the vehicle with the battery outside of these temperature extremes it will not function. Audible Pedestrian Warning System Your vehicle is equipped with an Audible Pedestrian Warning System. The Audible Pedestrian Warning System uses distinct sounds to alert pedestrians that your vehicle is approaching. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 The audible warning system uses an in-car sound synthesizer with a speaker located in the underhood compartment. The warning system is automatically activated when selecting DRIVE or REVERSE. Auto Park Auto Park will automatically place the transmission into PARK if there is an indication that the driver may leave the vehicle while still in the DRIVE, NEUTRAL or In DRIVE range, the system will remain active until the REVERSE gear. Refer to “Single-Speed Transmission” in vehicle reaches a speed of approximately 22 mph “Starting And Operating” for further information. (35.5 km/h). At approximately 22 mph (35.5 km/h) the E-Park warning system is deactivated and will automatically be active when the vehicle returns to approximately 20 mph The parking pawl is traditionally located inside an automatic transmission and activated when the vehicle is (32 km/h). placed in the PARK position. Single-Speed Transmission E-Park is activated when the driver pushes the PARK Instead of a traditional transmission, your vehicle is button. An electric motor activates the parking pawl and equipped with a single-speed transmission to transfer the locks the single-speed transmission when the vehicle is torque from the E-Drive motor to the drive wheels. This placed into PARK. This will prevent any unwanted transmission requires no maintenance and is designed to movement of the vehicle. operate for the life of the vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: The engagement of the E-Park can be heard when occupants and the high voltage battery while the vehicle there is no noise in the interior of the vehicle, this is a is being driven or when it is being charged. normal condition. The high voltage battery may require cooling to keep the vehicle running. The air conditioning compressor will Climate Control (HVAC System) activate without any input from the occupant. Your 500e is equipped with an Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) HVAC system. This HVAC system utilizes NOTE: The AC system helps cool the high voltage a humidity sensor, cabin sensor, and ambient tempera- battery. If the air conditioning system should require ture sensor to choose operation mode and control cabin service see your authorized dealer as soon as possible. comfort. These components allow the controller to operElectric Power Steering ate the HVAC system in a very efficient manner to Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Power Steering maximize driving range. (EPS) system. The power steering system requires no Your 500e also uses an electric air heater to provide heat maintenance and operates without the use of power to the cabin. steering fluid. Electric Air Conditioning Compressor Smartphone Features Your 500e uses an electric air conditioning compressor. With the “Uconnect Access” app, you can monitor the The air conditioning compressor is powered by the high state of charge of the high voltage battery or initiate voltage battery system and is used to cool the vehicle I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 charging from your phone. You can also turn on your How do I get the “Uconnect Access” smartphone App? vehicle’s climate control system remotely. The app pro- Visit the 500e registration website: vides the following features: www.fiatusa.com/500eRegistration • Monitor battery charge level • Display available driving distance • Check charging status • Remotely activate vehicle climate control system • Unlock and lock doors • Assist with locating your vehicle • Locate charging stations • Send a point-of-interest to your vehicle’s navigation system • Schedule a charge • View energy consumed Registration Website • Notifications for charging and preconditioning events I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Once in the registration website, you will need to enter 3. Once finished with registration you will be directed to your vehicle’s VIN and Connectivity ID. The connectivity your 500e owner’s site. ID is found in the vehicle’s instrument cluster. To locate 4. From the 500e owner’s site you will be able to downthe connectivity ID follow the steps below: load the 500e Uconnect Access mobile application and 1. Push the menu button on the instrument cluster. learn how to use your connected features. 2. Choose “Settings” and scroll down to the “Connectiv- 5. Use your owner’s site username and password for logging into the 500e Uconnect Access mobile appliity ID.” cation. 3. Select “Connectivity ID.” After obtaining the connectivity ID and VIN number NOTE: Your smartphone must have a valid data connection to use the 500e Uconnect Access mobile application. return to the vehicle registration website and perform the following: Need help with registration? 1. After entering the VIN (Vehicle Identification Num- Please call the Uconnect Call Center Toll Free number below: ber), Connectivity ID and your email address, click (855) 792-4241 “submit.” 2. You will now be asked to fill in your contact information and a user name and password. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 A Level 2 charging station can be installed at your residence. The Level 2 unit and installation service is available for purchase at your authorized dealer. ELECTRIC SYSTEM OPERATION Level 1 Charging (120V — Requires NEMA 5–15 Outlet) Level 1 charging is done by using a conventional 120 Volt AC grounded receptacle along with the NEMA 5–15 Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE) that comes standard with your vehicle. Refer to “Vehicle Charging Cord” for further information. Level 2 Charging (240V — Requires A 40 Amp Circuit Breaker Or Greater) Level 2 charging is accomplished by using 240V permanently mounted EVSEs and is the preferred method for charging your vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Level 2 Charging Station 2 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Charge Times The following factors determine the time it takes to charge the high voltage battery: • The high voltage battery’s current state of charge Type of Charge Level 1 (120V/15A) Level 2 (240V/30A) Estimated Charge Time Approximately 23 hours Approximately 4 hours Vehicle Charge Cord • What level EVSE is being used (Level 1 – 120V or Level 2 – 240V) • Ambient temperature Your vehicle comes equipped with a standard AC 120V NEMA 5-15 Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE) also referred to as a charge cord. The EVSE plugs into any standard AC grounded outlet and is used to charge the high voltage battery. To access • The charging times are estimates based on a com- the charge cord, lift the rear cargo cover and remove the pletely discharged high voltage battery. charging cord from the storage bin. NOTE: • Charging times will vary based on the age, condition, state of charge and temperature of the high voltage battery. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 2 EVSE Location SAE J1772 Charge Receptacle NOTE: The EVSE charge cord is used for Level 1 NOTE: The charge receptacle door locks and unlocks charging only. with the vehicle doors. SAE J1772 Charge Receptacle Your vehicle uses an industry standard SAE J1772 charge receptacle (vehicle’s inlet) for both AC Level 1 (120V) and AC Level 2 (240V) charging. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EVSE Operation And Status Information Indicator 2 — Fault Indicator LED 3 — Charge Level Indicator LED’s Description Green indicates READY RED indicates a fault All ON indicates system ready and not charging LED’s turning on and off in sequence indicates vehicle charging When the EVSE is first plugged in it will go through an initialization and self test. For the first three seconds after plugging in your EVSE all the LED’s will remain off. EVSE Status Indicators Indicator 1 — AC Indicator LED Description Green indicates READY RED Indicates a fault After approximately three seconds the EVSE performs an internal self test and Ground Continuity Test. This process takes approximately six seconds. During the internal self test the unit turns on one Charge Level Indicator LED every 1.5 seconds until all the Charge Level Indicator LED’s are illuminated. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 • Fault Indicator LED • • • AC LED Charge Level Indicator LED’s • o o o • • o o Time AC LED 1.5 sec 3.0 sec 4.5 sec 6.0 sec • Fault Indicator LED • Charge Level Indicator LED’s • • • • After the EVSE is connected to the vehicle’s charge inlet the EVSE will continue to illuminate all LED’s green. Once the vehicle begins charging the EVSE Charge level LED’s will illuminate in order from left to right, then shut off. This pattern will repeat as long as the EVSE remains • • • • • • connected to AC power and the vehicle is actively charging. Completion of charge will result in illuminatIf the self test is successful the AC LED, the Fault ing all LED’s green. If the vehicle stops charging, the LED Indicator LED and the four Charge Level LED’s will turn pattern will stop. solid green. The LED’s are illuminated and turn off at the rate of one The EVSE LED’s will be used to indicate the vehicle’s change per second and the battery is charging. connection status if no faults are found during the self test. • • • • • o I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • Fault Indicator LED • • AC LED Charging The High Voltage Battery Charge Level Indicator LED’s • o o o • • • o o • • • • • o • • • • • • Time 1.0 sec 2.0 sec 3.0 sec 4.0 sec 1. Put the vehicle in PARK. 2. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 3. Remove the Level 1 EVSE from its storage bin by lifting the rear cargo cover. Refer to the Level 1 User Manual for any additional information on its use or operation. EVSE Location I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 4. Uncoil the entire length of the EVSE (charge cord). 5. Plug the EVSE into a standard 120V AC outlet that is properly grounded. It is recommended that the EVSE is connected to an AC outlet on a circuit which is not electrically loaded by other devices. Extension cords may not be used. 2 NOTE: All of the EVSE LED’s illuminate green. 6. Open the charge receptacle door. NOTE: The charge receptacle door is locked whenever the vehicle is locked. Unlock the doors to unlock the charge receptacle door for charging. 7. Plug the EVSE into the charge receptacle. Push the EVSE in firmly until it is completely engaged (if not completely engaged the vehicle may not charge). EVSE Charge Coupler NOTE: • The vehicle will initiate the charging cycle automatically when all the conditions are satisfied. • The vehicle charge indicator will show the pattern for charging. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Charge Indicator Charge Receptacle Door 8. When charging is complete, or the vehicle needs to be NOTE: unplugged, remove the EVSE by pushing the button • In the event of an error in the charging process, the AC on the charge connector and pull firmly to remove it power to the vehicle will stop and a red indicator will from the charge receptacle. illuminate on the EVSE. 9. Close the charge receptacle door. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 • Keep the door for the charge receptacle closed when not in use. 2 Vehicle Charge Indicators Instrument Cluster High Voltage Battery Gauge There is a battery gauge indicator located on the instrument cluster. The battery gauge will display, with progressive color indication, the current state of charge for the high voltage battery; with the percentage value located at the bottom of the gauge. High Voltage Battery Gauge I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Charge Low And Limited Power Messages The state of charge is monitored during normal operation. If the state of charge reaches certain thresholds the following messages will also be displayed on the cluster: • charge low — displayed at 17% (warning displayed for six seconds). • charge low — displayed at 11% (Displayed for six seconds). Charge Low Message • charge low limited power mode — turtle displayed at 5% and remains on. • charge low limited power mode — turtle flashes at 0% until condition changes. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 NOTE: The limited power mode can also be activated if the NOTE: At 0% state of charge or below the following high voltage battery temperature is too high or too low. features will be disabled if in use: • Heated Seats • Electronic Speed Control • Climate Controls Instrument Panel State Of Charge Indicator In addition to the battery gauge your vehicle is equipped with a visual state of charge indicator. The state of charge indicator is made up of five lights that are mounted to the center of the instrument panel. Charge Low Limited Power Mode I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: In the event of an error in the charging process the outer two lights will blink. Number Of Indicator Lights Illuminated 1 Light 2 Lights 3 Lights 4 Lights 5 Lights State Of Charge Indicator The state of charge indicator represents the current state of charge for the high voltage battery. The state of charge indicator lights quickly to identify the battery state of charge while the vehicle is being charged. Each light represents the battery’s current percentage of charge. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Percent Of Battery Charge 0 – 20% 21 – 40% 41 – 60% 61 – 80% 81 – 100% THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 The vehicle is supplied with a code card containing key The key fob contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) code numbers to order duplicate keys, and the authotransmitter with an integrated key. To use the mechanical rized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can key, simply push the mechanical key release button. be used to order duplicate keys. A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Ignition Key Removal 1. Place the transmission in PARK. 2. Rotate the key to the OFF/LOCK position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder. Mechanical Key Release Button I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Ignition Switch Positions 1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK) 2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) 3 — AVV (START) • Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, place the transmission into PARK, and remove the Key Fob from the ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector buttons. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 Key-In-Ignition Reminder WARNING! (Continued) • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF/LOCK sounds a signal to remove the key. SENTRY KEY CAUTION! An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves. Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. Locking Doors With A Key You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the door, turn the key to the left. To unlock the door, turn the key to the right. Refer to “Body Lubrication” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for maintenance procedures. The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked. The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also Replacement Keys considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle. vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the key is turned a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot to the ON/RUN position, it indicates that there is a be programmed to any other vehicle. When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all veproblem with the electronics. hicle keys with you to an authorized dealer. CAUTION! • Always remove the Sentry Key from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. • The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection. The VIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer. General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have Operation is subject to the following two conditions: been programmed to the vehicle electronics. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and To Arm The System: 2. This device must accept any interference received, Push the Key Fob LOCK button. including interference that may cause undesired op- To Disarm The System: eration. Push the Key Fob UNLOCK button or cycle the ignition NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved to the ON/RUN position. by the party responsible for compliance could void the The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your user’s authority to operate the equipment. vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm. If one The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors of the previously described arming sequences has ocfor unauthorized entry and the ignition for unauthorized curred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of operation. If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the Security Alarm will provide the following audible and vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park lamps occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. and/or turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects. To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice, I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 within five seconds, to unlock all doors and the liftgate. The recommended replacement battery is CR2032. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the 1. Push the mechanical key release button and release the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also mechanical key to access the battery case screw loturn on. cated on the side of the Key Fob. Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To Lock The Doors And Liftgate Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal. Transmitter Battery Replacement Mechanical Key Release Button NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may ap- 2. Rotate the screw located on the side of the Key Fob using a small screwdriver. ply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Key Fob Screw Location Battery Case Removed 3. Take out the battery case. Remove and replace the 4. Refit the battery case inside the Key Fob and turn the battery observing its polarity. screw to lock it into place. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 General Information DOOR LOCKS The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio The door locks can be manually locked or unlocked from inside the vehicle by using the door handle. If the door Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: handle is pushed a red lock indicator will show on the This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and door handle (indicating locked) when the door is open or with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). closed, the door will lock. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Door Lock Handle I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. • For personal security and safety in the event of an collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle. • Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, place the transmission into PARK, and remove the Key Fob from the ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector buttons. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves. Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. CAUTION! I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Power Door Locks — If Equipped A power door lock switch is incorporated into the driver door handle. Push or pull the handle to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate. If the driver’s door handle is pushed a red lock indicator will show on the driver’s door handle (indicating locked) when the door is closed, the door will lock. 2 NOTE: To prevent the key from being locked in the vehicle, the doors will automatically unlock if the driver’s door handle is pushed when the key is in the ignition. Driver’s Power Door Lock Handle Auto Door Locks When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicles speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h). I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To change the setting proceed as follows: POWER WINDOWS 1. Briefly push the MENU button to enter the MENU Power Window Switches screen. There are single window controls located on the shifter or DOWN button to highlight bezel, below the climate controls, which operate the 2. Push the UP “Auto Door Locks”. Push the MENU button, use driver and passenger door windows. The window conor DOWN buttons to turn setting ON trols will operate when the ignition switch is in the the UP ON/RUN position. or OFF. 3. Briefly push the MENU button to go back to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU button (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing the settings. NOTE: Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accordance with local laws. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual on your DVD for further information. WARNING! Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not let children play with power windows. Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window. LIFTGATE Power Window Switches Auto-Down To unlock the liftgate, use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or activate the power door lock switches located on the front door handles. The driver’s door window switch has an Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch for approximately one second, To open the liftgate, squeeze the liftgate release handle release, and the window will go down automatically. To and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion. cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems: • Seat Belt Systems • Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags • Child Restraints Important Safety Precautions Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as Liftgate Handle Gas props support the liftgate in the open position. possible. However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera- Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when risk of harm from a deploying air bag: opening the liftgate in cold weather. 1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, shoulder belts properly. move the seat as far back as possible and use the 7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”) back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front 3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle Air Bags room to inflate. seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chilside air bags will inflate forcefully into the space dren who do not use child restraints or beltbetween occupants and the door and occupants could positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled be injured. up in a vehicle with a rear seat. 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact them or under their arm. the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided 5. You should read the instructions provided with your under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙ child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. Seat Belt Systems ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times. Driver And Passenger BeltAlert (If Equipped) BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the AVV/START position. Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even Initial Indication on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you. This can If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first turned to the AVV/START position, an intermittent happen far away from home or on your own street. chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown ignition switch is first turned to the AVV/START position from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on Change Of Status until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat BeltAlert Warning Sequence belts are buckled again. The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is un- when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. buckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy BeltAlert). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning and cargo is properly stowed. sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authodriver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactibelts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occuvating BeltAlert. pants to buckle their seat belts. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. Lap/Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts. The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle. WARNING! • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags. • In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly. • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. • Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. • Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size. • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug. • A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed. • A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you. (Continued) (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. • A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. • A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together. • A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. (Continued) Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat. 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 2 Pulling Out The Latch Plate Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully. Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ shoulder belt. 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point. Positioning The Lap Belt 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. 2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate. 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted. Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed. WARNING! • ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically required in order to properly fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the distance between the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches. • Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not long enough and only use in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm. Seat Belt Pretensioner The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints. Pregnant Women And Seat Belts NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an worn snugly and positioned properly. accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re- Restraints” section of this manual. The table below straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten- defines the type of feature for each seating position. sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately. Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, refer to “Installing Child • ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙ WARNING! • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a the entire seat belt is extracted. seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat. belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. WARNING! (Continued) only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child. Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) WARNING! Air Bag System Components • The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual. • Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions. • Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components: • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) • Air Bag Warning Light • Steering Wheel and Column • Instrument Panel • Knee Impact Bolsters • Advanced Front Air Bags I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: (Continued) 2 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • Supplemental Side Air Bags • Supplemental Knee Air Bags • Front and Side Impact Sensors • Seat Belt Pretensioners • Seat Belt Buckle Switch • Seat Track Position Sensors Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The 1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the 2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster 3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Advanced Front Air Bag Features WARNING! • Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel. • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors or other system components. The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions. This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Advanced Front Air Bag Operation WARNING! • No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel, because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bags to inflate. • Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating. • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags. Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration. Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli- Knee Impact Bolsters sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the away from an inflating air bag. driver and front passenger, and position the front occuWhen the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad- pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large Air Bags. quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the WARNING! Advanced Front Air Bags. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. • Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way. • Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and Advanced Front Air Bags. Supplemental Side Air Bags Your vehicle is equipped with two types of supplemental Side Air Bags: 1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs): Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or AIRBAG during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury label sewn into the outboard side of the seats. reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. 2 WARNING! Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label Location SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in 2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains certain side impacts in addition to the injury reduction (SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim potential provided by the seat belts and body structure. covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.” I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain side impact events. WARNING! • Your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions. • Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed. compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced Front Air Bags deploy. Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint. Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags, The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit including some collisions at certain angles, or some side upright with their backs against the seats. Children must collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat If A Deployment Occurs that is appropriate for the size of the child. The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment. WARNING! • Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat. • Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed. • Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags. NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system. If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur: • The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior blistering, see your doctor immediately. trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 • As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like WARNING! (Continued) particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immeskin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or System serviced as well. throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation NOTE: continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in- • Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, structions for cleaning. but they will open during air bag deployment. Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de- • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air authorized dealer immediately. bags will not be in place to protect you. Enhanced Accident Response System WARNING! Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions: I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: (Continued) 2 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • Cut off battery power to the motor. Air Bag Warning Light • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controluntil the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard ler (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light interconnecting wiring associated with air bag button. system electrical components. • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the battery has power. the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the • Unlock the power door locks. AVV/START or MAR position. If the ignition switch is in the STOP position the air bag system is not on and the air Enhanced Accident Response System Reset bags will not inflate. Procedure After an event occurs requiring activation of the Enhanced Accident Response System, when the system is active, a “Service EV System” message” will be displayed on the instrument cluster. The vehicle is not drivable in this state and must be towed to an authorized dealer immediately to be inspected and have the Enhanced Accident Response System reset. The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 the MAR position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup. • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving. NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protecThe ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc- system immediately. tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. WARNING! While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to dealer service the air bag system immediately. protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in the the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is on position, and stays on after you start the vehicle, or first turned to the MAR position. if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to service the air bag system immediately. eight-second interval. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! • Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards. • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system. • Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may (Continued) not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer. Event Data Recorder (EDR) This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of • How various systems in your vehicle were operating; personally identifying data routinely acquired during a • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts crash investigation. were buckled/fastened; To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equip• How fast the vehicle was traveling. ment, can read the information if they have access to the These data can help provide a better understanding of vehicle or the EDR. the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your Children 12 years or younger should ride properly child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the labels attached to the child restraint. Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has the rear seats rather than in the front. a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install WARNING! it in the vehicle where you will use it. In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to NOTE: hold even an infant on your lap could become so • For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org great that you could not hold the child, no matter or call 1-866-732-8243. how strong you are. The child and others could be • Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/eng/ should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size. motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Infants and Toddlers Small Children Larger Children Children Too Large for Child Restraints Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint Children who are at least two years old or who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint Children who have out-grown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt Children 12 years old or younger, who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle 2 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Infants And Child Restraints WARNING! Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat. • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat. All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt. WARNING! • Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s WARNING! (Continued) directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. • After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: (Continued) 2 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Children Too Large For Booster Seats 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip? Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone: If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly. 1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat? 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the way back? 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between their neck and arm? 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child’s thighs and not their stomach? WARNING! Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Weight of the Child + Child Restraint Rear-Facing Child Restraint Rear-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below LATCH – Seat Belt Only LATCH – Seat Belt + Top Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor Only + Top Tether Anchor X X X X X X I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information. Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle 2 • • Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position Top Tether Anchorage Symbol I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint? 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint? Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage? No No I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint. Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat? Can the head restraints be removed? Yes Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information. Yes, all may be removed Locating LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion. LATCH Anchorages I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. There are tether strap anchorages behind each Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower rear seating position located on the back of the anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some seat. rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage. Locating Tether Anchorages Center Seat LATCH WARNING! This vehicle does not have a center seating position. Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to install a child seat in the center of the back seat. Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here. To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat. 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child If the selected seating position has a Switchable Autorestraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seatmatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat ing position. belt, following the instructions below. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the to check what type of seat belt each seating position has. top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tions to attach a tether anchor. tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint anchorages. rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufac2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for turer’s instructions. that seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt: When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them. WARNING! • Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. • Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for additional information on ALR. 2 • ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor • I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint? Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat? Weight limit of the Child Restraint Can the head restraints be removed? Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint? Yes No Yes I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint. Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. Yes, all may be removed Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract 1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you position. For some second row seats, you may need to will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a now in the Automatic Locking mode. better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pull out any webrear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5. more room for the child seat. 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path. Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the “click.” seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor. 9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. WARNING! (Continued) tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle. Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage WARNING! Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to any location in front of the car seat, including the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the 1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 tether anchorage for that seating position, move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available. 2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint. Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to 4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram. restraint manufacturer’s instructions. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. WARNING! • An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. • If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap. Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or could injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision. SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA. WARNING! • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 WARNING! (Continued) • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt. Air Bag Warning Light The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Defroster WARNING! Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable. Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury. • Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners. • Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle. • Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats. Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 WARNING! (Continued) • Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning. • Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control. • If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory. Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle. Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges. Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure. Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel. Door Latches Check for proper closing, latching, and locking. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 2 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 ▫ Seat Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 ▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 ▫ EZ Entry Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 ▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .98 ▫ Memory Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 ▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 ▫ Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 ▫ Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .106 ▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .101 䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 ▫ Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 ▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 ▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 ▫ Forward/Rearward Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .103 ▫ High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 ▫ Recline Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 ▫ Flash-To-Pass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 ▫ Daytime Running Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 ▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 ▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 ▫ To Deactivate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 ▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 ▫ Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . .111 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 ▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 ▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 ▫ Ambient Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 䡵 REAR PARK ASSIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 ▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .113 ▫ Rear Park Assist Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .114 ▫ Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts . . . . . . . . . . .122 ▫ Front Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . .114 ▫ Failure Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 ▫ Rear Windshield Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 ▫ Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System . . . . . . .124 䡵 TILT STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . .117 ▫ Park Assist System Usage Precautions . . . . . . .125 䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . .118 䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .126 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 ▫ To Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 䡵 CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .132 ▫ To Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 ▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 ▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 ▫ Emergency Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 ▫ Sun Shade — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .129 ▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MIRRORS Inside Day/Night Mirror The mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window. Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the windshield). Adjusting Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by pushing the button at the base of the mirror. The On/Off symbol on the button will illuminate when the auto-dimming feature is enabled. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse. CAUTION! To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. Power Mirrors The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s door trim panel. Automatic Dimming Mirror I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move. WARNING! Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror. Power Mirror Switches The power mirror controls consist of a mirror select switch and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror, push the mirror select switch to either the L (left) or R (right) to select the mirror you need to adjust. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Spotter Mirror — If Equipped Folding Mirrors Some models are equipped with a driver’s side spotter The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to mirror. The spotter mirror allows for a greater range of pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The visibility on the driver’s side of the vehicle. mirror has three detent positions: full forward, normal and full rearward. Heated Mirrors — If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. Spotter Mirror I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sun Visors SEATS The driver and passenger sun visors are located on the Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the headliner, near the front windshield. The sun visor can be vehicle. rotated downward or up against the door glass. Both sun visors are equipped with courtesy mirrors. WARNING! • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Sun Visor (Passenger Side Shown) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Forward/Rearward Adjustment The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor. move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched. WARNING! • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. Recline Adjustment The recline adjustment lever is located on the inboard side of the seat. To recline the seatback, lift up the recline While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the lever, lean back until the desired position has been seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the reached, and release the lever. desired position is reached. Then, using body pressure, Adjusting Bar I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Seat Height Adjustment The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pump the lever upward to raise the seat height, or pump the lever downward to lower the seat height. Recline Lever WARNING! Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Height Adjuster UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Lift the seatback upright and push the seat rearward to The driver and front passenger seats have an EZ entry its locked position once the rear passengers are seated. feature for rear seat passengers. Pull forward on the Memory Feature release lever, located on the outboard side of the seatback, Both front seats have a memory feature, which can dump the seatback forward, then slide the seat forward operate in two ways: to allow access in and out of the rear seat. Memory Function Option 1 — Full Seat Back And Track Fore/Aft Position Memory: EZ Entry Feature After using the EZ entry function, the seatback angle and the Track fore/aft adjuster can both re-lock into the position they were most recently adjusted to. This is accomplished if the seat is moved fully rearward to its last fore/aft position on the tracks before the seat back is returned upright. Memory Function Option 2 — Seat Back Only Memory: EZ Entry Lever After using the EZ entry function, the seat back may first be returned upright prior to going back to the last I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE fore/aft (memory) position on the tracks. This results in the seat back memory being set only – The track will then be locked forward of its last set fore/aft memory position. To then reset the fore/aft track memory feature (to reestablish Memory Function Option 1), the seat has to be returned fully rearward to its last fore/aft memory track position as described in Memory Function Option 1. Heated Seats On some models, the front driver and passenger seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are located on the center instrument panel area. Push the switch once to turn on the heated seats. Push the switch a second time to shut the heating elements off. WARNING! • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. • Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat. TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt To open the hood, two latches must be released. within two to five minutes. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 1. Pull the bottom of the RED hood release lever, located on the left kick panel, rearward. 3 Hood Safety Latch Location 3. Lift the hood prop rod that clips to the right side (left side when standing in front of the hood) of the engine Hood Release Lever compartment. Place the hood prop rod in the hole of 2. Rotate the safety catch under the front edge of the hood hinge to secure the hood in the open position. hood, near the center, and raise the hood. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 in (30 cm) and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged. WARNING! Hood Prop Rod In hot climates, the prop rod may be hot. Pick up the prop rod at the foam on the end of the prop rod. Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 LIGHTS Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever, located on the left side of the steering wheel, controls the operation of the headlights, headlight beam selection, passing light and turn signals. 3 NOTE: The headlights can only be turned on with the ignition in the ON/RUN position. Headlights Rotate the end of the multifunction lever upward to the first detent for headlight operation. Headlight Operation NOTE: When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime Running Lights will be deactivated. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE High Beams Daytime Running Lights To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRL), rotate the With the low beams activated, push the multi- end of the multifunction lever to the O symbol. function lever towards the instrument panel to NOTE: The low beams and side/taillights will not be on turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever with DRL. toward the steering wheel to turn off the high beams. If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was Flash-To-Pass purchased the DRL function can be turned on or off using You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by the display menus. Refer to “UConnect settings” in partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer- “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further ining wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to formation. turn on until the lever is released. Turn Signals Parking Lights Push the multifunction lever upward to signal a right turn or downward to signal a left turn. The correspondTo turn on the parking lights, remove the key ing indicator in the instrument cluster will blink to or turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK position and indicate the operation of the turn signal. turn on the headlights. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three times then automatically turn off. Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for a preset period of time. Activation Remove the key or turn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position, and pull the multifunction lever toward the Turn Signal Operation steering wheel, within two minutes. Each time the lever NOTE: The indicators will automatically turn off when is pulled, the activation of the lights will be extended by the turn has been completed and the steering wheel is 30 seconds. The activation of the lights can be extended to returned to a straight position. a maximum of 210 seconds. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Deactivation CAUTION! Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel and hold it for more than two seconds. Interior Lights Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the switch is in the center position or that the lights are off to avoid draining the battery. The interior light switches are located in the overhead Interior Light Timing (Center Position) console. The interior lights can be set to three different positions (Off/Left Position, Center Position, On/Right There are four different modes of operation that can be activated in this position: Position). Using the switch on the left overhead, push the switch to • When one door is opened a three minute timer is the right from its center position and the lights are always activated. on. Push the switch to the left from its center position and • When the key is removed from the ignition (within the lights are always off. Leave the switch in the center two minutes of the ignition being turned off), a 10 position, and the lights are turned on and off when the second timer is activated. doors are opened or closed. The switch on the right side of the overhead console controls the map or reading • When the doors are unlocked with the Key Fob a 10 function of the lights. Push the switch to the right to turn second timer is activated. on the right light and push the switch to the left to turn on the left light. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 • When the doors are locked with the Key Fob the lights will turn off. Interior Light Timing (On/Right Position) • When all doors are closed a 15 minute timer is activated. NOTE: The timer is deactivated when the key is moved into the ON/RUN position. Ambient Light The vehicle is equipped with ambient light on the center Fog Light Switch stack. The ambient light will be on when the headlights Push the switch once to turn the front fog lights on. Push are turn on by rotating the end of the multifunction lever. the switch a second time to turn the front fog lights off. Front Fog Lights — If Equipped The fog light switch is located on the center stack of the instrument panel, just below the radio. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the right side of the steering column. NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only operate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position. Front Windshield Wiper Operation There are five different modes of operation for the front windshield wipers. The windshield wiper lever can be raised or lowered to access these modes: Windshield Wiper Operation Windshield Wiper Off This is the normal position of the wiper lever. Intermittent Wiper Operation Push the lever downward to the first detent. The wipers will operate intermittently. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 NOTE: The Intermittent function only has one detent but Front Windshield Washer Operation wiper delay will vary with changes in vehicle speed. As Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the vehicle speed increases the delay time will decrease. steering wheel to activate the washers. The wipers will activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is Low Speed released. Push the lever downward to the second detent. The wipers will operate at low speed. CAUTION! High Speed Push the lever downward to the third detent. The wipers will operate at high speed. Manual High Speed/Mist Push the lever upward from the off position. The wipers will operate at high speed to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. This operation will continue until the lever is released. When the lever is released, the wipers will return to the off position and automatically shut off. • Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off. • In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” position before turning off the vehicle. If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: (Continued) 3 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! (Continued) • Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position. If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage to the wiper motor may occur. Rear Windshield Wiper Rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer lever upward to the first detent past the intermittent settings for intermittent wipe operation. With the front windshield wiper active, rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer lever upward. The rear wiper will operate in the same mode as the front windshield wipers, but at half the frequency. When the transmission is placed into REVERSE, the rear wiper will automatically operate at Low Speed and return to normal operation when the transmission is placed out of REVERSE. Rear Wiper Operation NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only operate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position. Rear Windshield Washer Operation Push the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the instrument panel to activate the rear washer. Push and I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 hold the lever for more than a half second and the wipers will activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is released. TILT STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED 3 This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. The tilt control lever is located on the left-side of the steering column, below the turn signal controls. Tilt Control Lever Push down on the lever to unlock the column. With one hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the steering column up or down as desired. Push the lever up to lock the column firmly in place. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h). Electronic Speed Control Buttons The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut right side of the steering wheel. down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 To Activate To Set A Desired Speed Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be turned off when not in use. Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. WARNING! NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button. To Deactivate Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it. A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory. Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed in memory. To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h). I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To Vary The Speed Setting Metric Speed (km/h) • Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can inthe button results in an increase of 1 km/h. crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Underthe new set speed will be established. standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed increment shown is dependent on the selected To Decrease Speed speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can deU.S. Speed (mph) crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button. To Increase Speed • Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph The drivers preferred units can be selected through the increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information. button results in an increase of 1 mph. The speed decrement shown is dependant on the selected • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 U.S. Speed (mph) Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on button results in a decrease of 1 mph. moderate hills is normal. • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so continue to decrease until the button is released, then it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed the new set speed will be established. Control. Metric Speed (km/h) • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h. • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. To Accelerate For Passing WARNING! Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery. Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE REAR PARK ASSIST The Rear Park Assist system provides audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer to the “Park Assist System Usage Precautions” for the limitations of this system and recommendations. If several obstacles are detected, the Rear Park Assist system indicates the nearest obstacle. The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corresponds to the maximum height of an obstacle that would clear the underside of the car during the parking maneuver. Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when the transmission The Rear Park Assist is automatically activated when the is placed into REVERSE, an audible alert is activated. transmission is placed into REVERSE. The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver Rear Park Assist Sensors that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses The four Rear Park Assist sensors, located in the rear between the tones are directly proportional to the disfascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that tance from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succesis within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect sion indicate the presence of a very close obstacle. A obstacles, in the horizontal direction, from approximately continuous tone indicates that the obstacle is less than 12 12 in (30 cm) up to 55 in (140 cm) from the center of the in (30 cm) away. rear fascia/bumper and up to 24 in (60 cm) from the corners of the rear fascia/bumper, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Rear Park Assist System SIGNAL Obstacle Distance Failure MEANING An obstacle is present within the sensors’ field of view Sensor or System failures INDICATION Audible signal (dashboard loudspeaker) • Sound pulses emitted at a rate that increases as the distance decreases. • Emits continuous tone at 12 in (30 cm). • Adjustable volume level. (Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information). Visual Signal (instrument panel) • Icon appears on display. • Message is displayed on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (where provided). I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is not Refer to ⬙Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)⬙ in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further muted. information. The audible signal is turned off immediately if the distance increases. The tone cycle remains constant if the The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the distance measured by the inner sensors is constant. If this ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Failures are indicondition occurs for the external sensors, the signal is cated immediately if they occur when the system is ON. turned off after 3 seconds (stopping warnings during Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor maneuvers parallel to walls). is in failure condition, the EVIC shall indicate that the Rear Park Assist system is unavailable, without reference to the sensor in failure condition. If even a single sensor A malfunction of the Rear Park Assist sensors or system fails, the entire system must be disabled. The system is is indicated, during REVERSE gear engagement, by the turned off automatically. instrument panel warning icon and message displayed on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System display. Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash Failure Indications The warning icon is illuminated and a message soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In is displayed on the EVIC display (if equipped). washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the vapor jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 in (10 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors. Park Assist System Usage Precautions not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper. • Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/ • Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a or other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist sensor problem, causing a failure indication to be system operating properly. displayed in the instrument cluster. NOTE: • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of Rear Park Assist. CAUTION! • Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The Rear Park Assist system might • Rear Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: (Continued) 3 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Rear Park Assist in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using Rear Park Assist. • Before using the Rear Park Assist System, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns on the single flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. WARNING! • Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Rear Park Assist system. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. (Continued) POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof roof switch is located in the overhead console. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 WARNING! (Continued) Power Sunroof Switch WARNING! • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. • In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured. • Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To Open Pinch Protect Feature Push and hold the power sunroof switch rearward for approximately one second and the sunroof will stop at the vented position. Push the switch a second time and hold for approximately one second and release, the sunroof will open fully, then stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, push the switch forward and release to Express Close. Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the With the sunroof in the full open position, pull the power ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the sunroof button and hold it for approximately one second, windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain the sunroof will return to the vented position. Pull the open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurswitch a second time and hold for approximately one rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with second to completely close the sunroof. the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window. To Close I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Emergency Operation In case of electrical failure, the sunroof can be operated with the hex wrench that is located in the glove box. There is a plug located in the rear of the sunroof opening at the center of the vehicle. Removing the plug reveals a hex opening in the motor assembly of the sunroof. Insert the hex wrench and turn, moving the sunroof to the desired location. Sun Shade — If Equipped For vehicles equipped with either a power sunroof or a fixed glass roof, there is a sun shade that can be open or Manual Sun Shade closed. To open the sun shade, push the tab and move the ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS shade to a full open position. There is a standard 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet, located in the floor console, for added convenience. This power outlet can power mobile phones, electronics and other low power devices. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! • Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watts (13 Amps) power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced. • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Power Outlet Power is available when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or START position. Insert the cigar lighter or accessory plug into the outlet for use. To preserve the heating element, do not hold the lighter in the heating position. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 WARNING! To avoid serious injury or death: • Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. • Do not touch with wet hands. • Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle. • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure. Power Outlet Fuse Location – Underhood F15 Fuse 15 A Blue Cigar Lighter Front Console/Aux Power Outlet I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 3 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED CAUTION! • Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with great caution. • After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery. This is located on the center console, in front of the cup holders. To activate the cigar lighter, push and release the knob. After a few seconds the knob automatically returns to its initial position, and the cigar lighter is ready for use. WARNING! When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot. To avoid serious injury, handle the cigar lighter with care. Always check that the cigar lighter has turned off. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 For rear passengers, there are cupholders located on the For the driver and front passenger, cupholders are lo- floor between the front driver and passenger seats. cated on the floor console between the front seats. CUPHOLDERS 3 Rear Cupholders Front Cupholders I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE STORAGE CARGO AREA FEATURES Glove Compartment The glove compartment is located on the right side of the instrument panel. Pull outward on the glove compartment latch to open the glove compartment. Push the glove compartment door upward to close it. The rear seatbacks have a fold down feature to allow increased cargo capacity. Glove Compartment Latch Push down the release button, located at the outboard top of the seatback and move the seatback to its foldeddown position to provide a flat load floor cargo area. When returning the seatback to its upright position, push rearward until the seatback is properly latched. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 3 Rear Seat Release Buttons Folded Rear Seats I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE REAR WINDOW FEATURES CAUTION! Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located in the center of the instrument panel, below the radio. Push this button to turn on the rear window defroster. An indicator in the instrument panel cluster will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes. To manually shut the defroster off, push the button a second time. Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: • Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS 䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .139 ▫ EVIC Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 ▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS . . . . . . .142 ▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 ▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .150 ▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .160 ▫ White Telltale Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 ▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 ▫ Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 䡵 iPod/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 ▫ Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 ▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 138 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 5.0 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 ▫ Harmful Interference Statement. . . . . . . . . . . .186 ▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 䡵 UCONNECT 5.0 VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK 䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 ▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Introducing Uconnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES ▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 䡵 TELEMATICS MODEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 ▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . ▫ Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 ▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 ▫ Radio Operation And Mobile Phones. . . . . . . .186 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: . .187 . .187 . .188 . .188 . .189 . .189 . .190 . .195 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 4 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1 — Side Vent 2 — Multifunction Lever – Light Control (Behind Steering Wheel) 3 — Instrument Cluster And Electronic Vehicle Information Center 4 — Windshield Wiper, Washer, Trip Computer (Behind Steering Wheel) 5 — Central Air Vents 6 — Storage Compartment 7 — Passenger Air Bag 8 — Rear Defrost Button 11 — Power Window Controls 12 — Heated Seat Controls/Front Fog Light Control 13 — ESC Off 9 — Hazard Button 14 — Horn/Driver Airbag 10 — Climate Controls I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 4 Instrument Cluster I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1. Battery Charge Gauge • This gauge indicates the charge level of the battery. 2. Speedometer • Indicates vehicle speed. WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator light switches on in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained in the Owner Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a failure indication. 3. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) • When the appropriate conditions exist, this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) messages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information All active telltales will display first if applicable. The system check menu may appear different based upon 4. Power Flow Gauge equipment options and current vehicle status. Some This gauge indicates how battery energy is being used by telltales are optional and may not appear. the vehicle: • ECO Mode (Green): The vehicle is conserving energy. • POWER Mode (Red): The vehicle is utilizing energy. • CHARGE Mode (Purple): The vehicle is regenerating energy. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143 Red Telltale Indicator Lights Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Air Bag Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Air Bag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145 Brake Warning Light Red Telltale Light United States Canada What It Means Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir. If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level. Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary. Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer. WARNING! The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position. Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147 Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped Red Telltale Light What It Means Electric Power Steering Fail Warning This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Power Steering System). Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting and Operating” for further information. Plugged In Indicator Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Plugged In Indicator Light This red indicator will illuminate if there is a malfunction or interruption during the vehicle charging process. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Door Open Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Door Open Warning Light This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed. . • Driver’s Door Open • Passenger Door Open • Driver and Passenger Door Open I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149 Service Propulsion System Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Service Propulsion System Warning Light The Service Propulsion System Warning Light will illuminate if there is a malfunction detected with the Propulsion System. If the light comes on or remains on while driving see your authorized dealer. Charging System Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Charging System Warning Light This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s nonessential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer. If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies.” I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Liftgate Open Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Liftgate Open Warning Light This indicator will turn when the liftgate is open. Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights EV System Malfunction Indicator Light Yellow Telltale Light What It Means EV System Malfunction Indicator Light This indicator will illuminate when there is a malfunction in the Electric Vehicle (EV) System. If the EV System Malfunction Indicator light comes on while driving or charging see your authorized dealer as soon as possible. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the AVV/START position. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. • The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to AVV/START. • Each time the ignition is turned to AVV/START, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously. • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153 Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and battery charge efficiency may not be guaranteed. Should two or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in sequence. In any situation in which the message on the display is ⬙See manual⬙, it is ESSENTIAL to refer to the contents of the ⬙Wheels⬙ paragraph in the ⬙Technical data⬙ chapter, strictly complying with the indications that you find there. IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to those tires. maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been low tire pressure telltale. equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord- malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi- system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and approximately one minute and then remain continuously can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also increases high illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsevoltage battery consumption and tire tread life, and may quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155 When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked. The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Vehicle Security Indicator Light Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Vehicle Security Indicator Light This indicator will illuminate when the Vehicle Theft Alarm system has detected an attempt was made to break into the vehicle. Regenerative Brake System (RBS) Indicator Light Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Regenerative Brake System (RBS) Indicator Light If the light turns on and remains on while driving, it suggests that there is a potential problem with the Regenerative Brake System (RBS) and the need for system service. See your authorized dealer as soon as possible. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157 Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on. If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Rear Defrost Light Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Rear Defrost Light This indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 20 minutes.. CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: • Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159 Icy Road Condition Indicator Light Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Icy Road Condition Indicator Light This light will illuminate during an icy road condition. Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light This light will illuminate when there is a malfunction in one of the exterior bulbs. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Green Telltale Indicator Lights Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light Green Telltale Light What It Means Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on. Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped Green Telltale Light What It Means Front Fog Indicator Light This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161 Turn Signal Indicator Lights Green Telltale Light What It Means Turn Signal Indicator Lights The instrument cluster arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT). Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light Green Telltale Light What It Means Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light This light will turn on when the cruise control has been engaged. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Plugged In Indicator Light Green Telltale Light What It Means Plugged In Indicator Light This green indicator will illuminate when the vehicle is plugged in. White Telltale Indicator Light Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light White Telltale Light What It Means Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163 Blue Telltale Indicator Light High Beam Indicator Light Blue Telltale Light What It Means High Beam Indicator Light This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam. If the driver’s door is open, and the headlights or park lights are left on, the high beam indicator light will remain illuminated. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) The EVIC consists of the following: • System Status The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the • Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays instrument cluster. • Outside Temperature Display • Trip Computer Functions • Tire Pressure Monitoring Display • Range EVIC Control Buttons The EVIC control buttons are located on the right side of the Instrument Cluster. There are three control buttons that are used to navigate through the EVIC functions: • + button Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display • – button • MENU ESC button I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 Push and release the + button to scroll upward through the displayed menu and the related options or to increase the displayed value. Push and release the – button to scroll downward through the displayed menu and the related options or to decrease the value displayed. + and – buttons activate different functions according to the following situations: • To scroll the menu options upwards or downwards. • To increase or decrease values during settings. When opening one of the front doors, the EVIC display will come on and information such as odometer and Push and release the MENU ESC button briefly to access clock will be displayed. the menu and/or go to next screen or to confirm the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) required menu option. Push and hold the MENU ESC Setup Menu button (approximately one second) to return to the main The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a screen. cycle. Push and release the + and – buttons to access the different options and settings (setup). EVIC Control Buttons I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The setup menu can be activated by pushing the MENU 2. Push and release the + or – button (by single pushes) ESC button. Single pushes on the + or – buttons will to select the new setting. scroll through the setup menu options. The menu in3. Briefly push and release the MENU ESC button to cludes the following functions: store the new setting and go back to the main menu • Battery % Display option previously selected. • Button Volume • Stored Warnings • Tutorial • Connectivity ID • Restore Factory Settings Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Submenu: 1. Briefly push and release the MENU ESC button to display the first submenu option. 2. Push and release the + or – button (by single pushes) to scroll through all the submenu options. • Exit Menu 3. Briefly push and release the MENU ESC button to select the displayed submenu option and to open the Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu Without relevant setup menu. Submenu: 4. Push and release the + or – button (by single pushes) 1. Briefly push and release the MENU ESC button to to select the new setting for this submenu option. select the main menu option to set. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 5. Briefly push and release the MENU ESC button to store the new setting and go back to the previously selected submenu option. 6. Push and hold the MENU ESC button to return to the main menu (short hold) or the main screen (longer hold). 4 Trip Computer The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster. The Trip Computer displays trip information such as: average speed, distance traveled, average energy, time traveled, motor power, and tire pressure. Trip Button • A short button push scrolls through the user-selectable information. The TRIP button is located on the right steering column stalk. • A long button push resets. Trip Button I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The User-Selectable options are: Trip Functions • Motor Power (Kilowatts) Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of new trip). • Trip A • Trip B • Tire Pressure New Trip To reset: • Push and hold the TRIP button manually. “Trip A” can be used to display the figures relating to: • distance • avg. energy • avg. speed • elapsed time (driving time) “Trip B” can be used to display the figures relating to: • When the “Trip Distance” reaches 9999.9 miles/ • distance kilometers or when the “Elapsed Time” reaches 29.59 (29 hours and 59 minutes) the system will reset auto- • avg. energy matically. • avg. speed • elapsed time (driving time) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 Values Displayed Distance Traveled Range This value shows the distance covered since the last reset. This indicates the distance which may be travelled with Average Speed the remaining battery charge, assuming that driving This value shows the vehicle’s average speed as a funcconditions will not change. The message “----” will tion of the overall time elapsed since the last reset. appear when the system is initializing. Elapsed Time NOTE: The range depends on several factors: driving style, type of route (freeway, residential, mountain roads, This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset. etc.), conditions of use of the car (load, tire pressure, etc.). UCONNECT RADIOS Trip planning must take into account the above notes. For detailed information about your Uconnect radio, refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL iPod/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB or AUX port, located in the center console. USB/AUX Port 1 — Auxiliary Cable Jack 2 — USB Connector I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 UCONNECT SETTINGS The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the center of the instrument panel that allow you to access and change the customer programmable features. Many features can vary by vehicle. 4 Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate 1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen 2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Buttons On The Faceplate Buttons On The Touchscreen Buttons on the faceplate are located below, and beside the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF). Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect touchscreen. Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 5.0 Settings Push the Settings button on the faceplate, to display the settings menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable feature Your Uconnect system may also have Display Off and settings. back arrow buttons on the faceplate. NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a Push the Display Off button on the faceplate to turn off time. the Uconnect screen. Push the Display Off button on the When making a selection, press the button on the touchfaceplate a second time to turn the screen on. screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired Push the Back Arrow button on the faceplate to exit out mode, press and release the preferred setting and make of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system. your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen or the Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu or I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of When the desired charging schedule has been set up, the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow press the “X” button on the touchscreen to save the buttons on the right side of the screen will allow you to schedule and close the settings menu. toggle up or down through the available settings. NOTE: Refer to “Electric System Operation” for further NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition information regarding charging your vehicle. in the “ AVV/ACC ” position. Display Charging Schedule After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen To set up a charging schedule, press the “More” or the following settings will be available. “Settings” button on the touchscreen. • Display Mode Press the “Enable Schedule” box on the touchscreen. A When in this display you may select the “Auto” or check mark will appear in the box indicating that sched- “Manual” display settings. To change Mode status, press uling has been turned on. Continue setting up the and release the “Auto” or “Manual” button on the schedule picking from the following menus: touchscreen. • Weekdays or Weekends • Start and End Times • Brightness When in this display, you may select the overall screen brightness with the headlights on or off. Adjust the I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL brightness with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the Units touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale be- After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you tween the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen. may select each unit of measure independently displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information System (EVIC) or • Language Driver Information Display (DID). The following selectWhen in this display, you may select one of multiple able units of measure are listed below: languages (English/Español/Français) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the naviga- • US tion system (if equipped). Press the “Language” button Changes the EVIC/DID to US units of measure. on the touchscreen, then press the desired language • Metric button on the touchscreen. Changes the EVIC/DID to Metric units of measure. • Touchscreen Beep When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the • Custom sound heard when a touchscreen button is pressed. Press • Temperature Select from: “°C,” or “°F.” the “Touchscreen Beep” button on the touchscreen then “On” or “Off.” • Pressure Select from: “psi” or “kPa.” I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 Voice Clock & Date After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touchfollowing settings will be available: screen the following settings will be available: • Voice Response Length • Set Time and Format When in this display, you may change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response Length, press the “Voice Response Length” button on the touchscreen and select from “Brief” or “Long.” When in this display, you may set the time and format manually. Press the “Set Time and Format” button then choose from a 12 hour or 24 hour format. Press the corresponding arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then select “AM” or “PM.” • Show Command List When in this display, you may change the Show Command List settings. To change the Show Command List settings, press the “Show Command List” button on the touchscreen and select from “Always,” “With Help” or “Never.” • Show Time Status When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time Status setting press the “Show Time Status” button on the touchscreen and select from “ON” or “OFF.” I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Set Date and operating information. To make your selection, press the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen and When in this display, you may set the date manually. select “On” or “Off.” Press the back arrow button on the Press the “Set Date” button on the touchscreen then press touchscreen to return to the previous menu. the corresponding arrows above and below the current Lights date to adjust. • Sync Time — If Equipped After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available. When in this display, you may sync the time with GPS. Press the “Sync Time” button on the touchscreen and • Daytime Running Lights select from “ON” or “OFF.” When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on while the engine is running. To make your selection, Safety/Assistance press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touchAfter pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the screen, then choose “On” or “Off.” The button will touchscreen the following setting will be available: highlight indicating that the setting has been selected. • Hill Start Assist Doors & Locks When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchsystem is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control screen the following setting will be available. System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 • Auto Door Locks • Radio Off Delay When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto Door Locks” button on the touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off.” When this feature is selected, the radio will stay on for a preset time after the ignition key is turned to STOP/OFF. To change the Radio Off Delay status, press the “0 MIN” or “20 MIN” button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval. • Remote Door Unlock/Door Unlock • Radio Off With Door — If Equipped When “Driver” is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first push of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button, you must push the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When “All” is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. When this feature is selected, the radio will turn off when a door is opened. To make your selection, select from “On” or “Off” on the touchscreen. Engine Off Options Audio After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available: • Equalizer After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” touchscreen the following settings will be available. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any Phone/Bluetooth point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen. touchscreen the following settings will be available: NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your • Paired Phones finger up or down to change the setting as well as press This feature shows which phones are paired to the directly on the desired setting. Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer • Balance to the Uconnect Supplement Manual. When in this display you may adjust the Balance settings. SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped • Auto-On Radio After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchThe Radio automatically turns on when vehicle is in run screen, the following settings will be available: or will recall whether it was on or off at last ignition off. • Tune Start To make your selection, push the “Settings” button, then Tune Start begins playing the current song from the “Audio,” then “Auto-On Radio.” beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play. To make your selection, press the “Tune Start” button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.” • Channel Skip SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen. • Subscription Information services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online. NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only. Restore Settings After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available: • Restore Settings New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free When this feature is selected it will reset the Display, limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. with your radio. Following the expiration of the free I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL To restore the settings to their default setting, press the Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?” select “Yes” to restore, or “No” to exit. Once the settings are restored, a pop up appears stating ⬙settings reset to default.⬙ Clear Personal Data UCONNECT 5.0 VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS Introducing Uconnect Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0 system. After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button Key Features: on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail• 5.0” Full Color Touchscreen Display able: • Clear Personal Data • Bluetooth With Integrated Voice Control When this feature is selected it will remove personal data • GPS Navigation (If Equipped) including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data” button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to clear all personal data?” select “Yes” or “No” to exit. Once the data has been cleared, a pop up appears stating ⬙Personal data cleared”. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition. 3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver. 4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first push either the VR or PHONE button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command. Uconnect 5.0 Get Started 5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or PHONE button and saying a Voice Command from current category. All you need to control your Uconnect system with your 1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and voice are the buttons on your steering wheel. feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Basic Voice Commands The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect system. Push the VR button . After the beep, sayѧ • Cancel to stop a current voice session • Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands • Repeat to listen to the system prompts again Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen. VR And Phone Buttons 1 — Push to MUTE 2 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text 3 — Push To End Call 4 — Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 Radio Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.) Push the VR button . After the beep, sayѧ • Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM • Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1 Uconnect 5.0 VR I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or Media want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and and say “Help.” The system will provide you with Auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only a list of commands. available for connected USB and iPod devices. . After the beep, say one of the Push the VR button following commands and follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist. • Change source to Bluetooth • Change source to iPod • Change source to USB • Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical Uconnect 5.0 Radio I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 TIP: Press the “Browse” button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your iPod or USB device. Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre information is displayed. Voice Text Reply Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push and say Listen. (Must have the PHONE button compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.) 1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push . After the beep, say... “Rethe PHONE button ply.” 2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system prompts. PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later. No. Start without I’ll be late. me. Uconnect 5.0 Media I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES Okay. Where are you? I will be minutes Call me. Are you there late. yet? I’ll call you I need direcSee you in later. tions. of minutes. I’m on my way. Can’t talk right now. I’m lost. Thanks. by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation. Harmful Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa• This device may not cause harmful interference. tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit • This device must accept any interference received, UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supincluding interference that may cause undesired opports reading incoming text messages only. eration. Radio Operation And Mobile Phones NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in by the party responsible for compliance could void the your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from user’s authority to operate the equipment. your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 Additional Information STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS © 2015 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and The remote sound system controls are located on the rear Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a access the switches. trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Uconnect System Support: • U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com • Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca • Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET • Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET • Sun., Closed Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume. Radio Operation Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will “Seek” down for the next listenable station. The button located in the center of the left-hand control Pushing the center button will make the radio switch will tune to the next preset station that you have probetween the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/ grammed in the radio preset button. AUX/Media Player, etc.) and can also be used to select/ enter an item while scrolling through menu. RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from control is different depending on which mode you are in. your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is The following describes the left-hand control operation in not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does each mode. not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 TELEMATICS MODEM • Email and SMS notifications Your vehicle is equipped with a 3G CDMA cellular NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC. modem to connect the vehicle with your device to Operation is subject to the following conditions: provide the following features: • This device may not cause harmful interference. • Range and State of Charge Information • This device must accept any interference received, • Configure Scheduled Charging Profile including interference that may cause undesired operation. • Average and total energy used • Charge station location and availability on in vehicle Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s NAV map authority to operate the equipment. • Send navigation destination to vehicle from within CLIMATE CONTROLS Mobile App The air conditioning and heating system is designed to • Remote Door Lock/Unlock make you comfortable in all types of weather. • Remote Horn and Lights Activation • Pre-conditioning of interior temperature I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) • The Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) allows the occupant to select a comfort settings. • The system provides set-and-forget operation for optimum comfort and convenience. • The system can be controlled manually, if desired. The ATC system automatically maintains the interior comfort level desired by the occupant. Automatic Temperature Controls 1. AUTO Temperature Control (ATC) Button Controls airflow, temperature, distribution, and air recirculation automatically. Push and release to select. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for more information. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 are selected. This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Push and release to change the current Air Conditioning AUTO mode. (A/C) setting. Performing this function will cause the The operator can also select the direction of the airflow ATC to switch into manual mode. by selecting one of the following positions. 3. Temperature Control Up Button 5. Mix Mode Provides temperature up control. Push the button for Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side warmer temperature settings. window demister outlets. This setting works best 4. Blower Control Up/Down Buttons in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the There are 12 fixed blower speeds. The blower control windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort up/down buttons regulate the amount of air forced while reducing moisture on the windshield. Performing through the system in any mode you select. The blower this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual speed increases as you push, or hold, the blower control mode. up button and decreases when you push, or hold, the 6. Front Defrost blower control down button. Push and release to change the current airflow The blower fan speed may be set to any fixed speed by setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates pushing the blower control up or down buttons. The fan when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds 2. A/C Button I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL and side window demist outlets. When the defrost but- NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed ton is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers mode with maximum temperature settings for best wind- for maximum airflow to the rear. shield and side window defrosting and defogging. Per9. Bi-Level forming this function will cause the ATC to switch into Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets. manual mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the Press and release the Panel mode button and Floor climate system will return the previous setting. mode button to enter Bi-Level mode, the indicators 7. Floor Mode illuminate when ON. Performing this function will cause Air is directed through the floor outlets with a the ATC to switch into manual mode. small amount flowing through the defrost and 10. Temperature Control Down Button side window demister outlets. Performing this function Provides temperature down control. Push the button for will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. cooler temperature settings. 8. Panel Mode NOTE: If the temperature is lowered until ⬙Lo⬙ is disAir is directed through the outlets in the instruplayed, all high voltage Heating, Ventilation, and Air ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct Conditioning (HVAC) systems are deactivated and amairflow. Performing this function will cause the ATC to bient air is circulated according to the Heating, Ventilaswitch into manual mode. tion, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) control settings. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 outlets. If Economy mode is desired, push the A/C button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC display and Push and release to turn the Climate Control ON or OFF. deactivate the A/C system. 12. Recirculation Control Button NOTE: Push and release to change the current setting. The • If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode, the A/C can indicator illuminates when ON. be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active NOTE: When in Defrost mode, the Recirculation button to prevent fogging of the windows. will flash if pushed. This indicates that you can not • If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, proceed to this mode due to fogging risk. select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if Climate Control Functions needed. 11. Climate Control ON/OFF Button Air Conditioning (A/C) Recirculation Control The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When in A/C mode with the ATC set to a cool temperature, dehumidified air flows through the air When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate interior air by pushing the RECIRCULATION control button. Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. The recirculation LED will illuminate when I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL this button is selected. Push the button a second time to 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the temperature conturn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside trol buttons. Once the desired temperature is disair into the vehicle. played, the system will achieve and automatically NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may maintain that comfort level. lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature may be unavailable (indicator light shall blink) if 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will expericonditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Consystem to function automatically. trols, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation. RecirculaNOTE: tion will be disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this • It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide and then turn off. comfort as quickly as possible. Automatic Operation • The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric 1. Push the AUTO button on the Automatic Temperature units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable Control (ATC) Panel, the indicator will illuminate when on. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 feature. Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information Operating Tips Center (EVIC) — Customer-Programmable Features” NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for in this section of the manual. suggested control settings for various weather condiManual Operation tions. The system allows for manual selection of blower speed, Window Fogging air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation conWindows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside trol. the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases, adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at turning the air conditioning (pressing the A/C button) on a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control, air allows the front occupants to control the volume of air direction, and blower speed to maintain comfort. circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode. As the temperature gets colder, it may be necessary to The operator can also select the direction of the airflow direct air onto the windshield. Adjust the temperature by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C control and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher operation and Recirculation control can also be manually blower speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the selected in Manual operation. Defrost mode. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 4 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows. Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging. Winter Operation When operating the system during the winter months, make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstructions. NOTE: Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will au- Vacation Storage tomatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield. Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable. conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the Summer Operation fresh air using the high blower setting. This will ensure Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility automatic recirculation system. When the system senses of compressor damage when the air conditioning system a heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use Recir- is started again. culation A/C mode to provide additional comfort while in automatic mode. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 Operating Tips Chart 4 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS 䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 ▫ Single-Speed Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 ▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 ▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 ▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 䡵 SINGLE–SPEED TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . .203 䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 ▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 ▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 ▫ Auto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .216 䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .210 ▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . .216 ▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 ▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217 ▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 ▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .218 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 200 STARTING AND OPERATING ▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .219 ▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 ▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . .221 ▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 ▫ Regenerative Braking System (RBS) . . . . . . . . .222 䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 ▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 ▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .227 ▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .229 ▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .230 䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .234 ▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 ▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 ▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 ▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 ▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 ▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 ▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . . .247 䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .248 ▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 䡵 PREMIUM TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 ▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .237 ▫ Premium TPM System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 201 ▫ Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 ▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .256 ▫ TPMS Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 䡵 EXTENDING YOUR DRIVING RANGE PER CHARGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 ▫ Driver Behavior Gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 ▫ Range Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 202 STARTING AND OPERATING STARTING PROCEDURES Single-Speed Transmission Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both The transmission must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts. position before you can start the vehicle. Apply the brakes when selecting a transmission gear from Park. WARNING! • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children). A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before selecting a transmission gear. Normal Starting Turn the key to the START position while your vehicle is in PARK. When the ignition key is turned to the START and then released to the RUN position, a chime will sound and the “READY” indicator in the EVIC will illuminate to indicate the 500e’s Electric Drive System has started. When the “READY” indicator is illuminated your 500e is ready to be driven. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 203 • If the “READY” indicator fails to illuminate after you have followed the normal starting procedure contact your authorized dealer. SINGLE–SPEED TRANSMISSION Your 500e uses a Single-Speed Transmission to direct the output from the electric motor. The single-speed transmission is operated using push-buttons instead of a traditional shift lever. “READY” Indicator NOTE: • If the key is held in the START position for more than 10 seconds “READY” mode will not be achieved. Return the key to OFF position, and then back to the START position and hold for less than 10 seconds to achieve “READY”. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 204 STARTING AND OPERATING The push-buttons are located on the lower instrument panel. CAUTION! Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: • Place the transmission into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. • Place the transmission into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. • Before placing the transmission into any range make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. NOTE: Single-Speed Transmission Push-Buttons • You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK. • If all push-button LEDs are on when the key is ON, see your authorized dealer. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 205 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Only place the transmission into gear when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the vehicle is in “READY” mode. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the ignition key. Once the key is removed, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition key and lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission range buttons. • Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children). A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the OFF position. The key can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the OFF position, and once removed, the transmission is locked in PARK. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 206 STARTING AND OPERATING When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before placing the transmission into PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Gear Ranges Push the desired push button to shift into gear. NOTE: • The brake pedal must be depressed to select a transmission gear. NOTE: Refer to the transmission range position displayed on the EVIC and verify that it indicates the PARK • After selecting any gear, wait a moment to allow the position. selected gear to engage before accelerating. PARK (P) WARNING! The PARK selection supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The vehicle can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this PARK. When parking on a level surface, you may place the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake. • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. • Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 207 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal. The vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift the transmission into gear when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the vehicle is in “ready mode”. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the ignition key. Once the key is removed, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition key and lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission range buttons. • Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children). A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 208 STARTING AND OPERATING REVERSE (R) CAUTION! This gear is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. NEUTRAL (N) The vehicle may be started in this gear. Apply the parking brake and place the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle. Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. DRIVE (D) Use this gear for all city and highway driving. WARNING! Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. Auto Park The Auto Park feature automatically places the transmission into PARK if there is any indication that the driver may leave the vehicle while the transmission is in D (DRIVE), N (NEUTRAL) or R (REVERSE). I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 209 Auto Park is enabled under the following conditions: Mode Of Operation With Key ON: • Key On (12 Volt ON and High Voltage OFF) or READY Auto Park will be engaged when the transmission is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL or REVERSE and the following conmode (12 Volt ON and High Voltage ON). ditions are detected: • Vehicle speed is below 2 mph (3 km/h). • Seat Belt is unlatched NOTE: • Brake pedal is released • Auto Park is enabled (only once) at the beginning of each key cycle and is re-enabled each time the vehicle • Driver’s door is ajar speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h). • Vehicle speed is less than 2 mph (3 km/h) • Auto Park is disabled above 2 mph (3 km/h) and Mode Of Operation With Key OFF: transmission range will be maintained. Auto Park will be engaged when the transmission is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL or REVERSE and the vehicle speed is The instrument cluster will display an Auto Shift To Park less than 2 mph (3 km/h). message and chime once when Auto Park is activated. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 210 STARTING AND OPERATING DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Traction Acceleration When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed: Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front (driving) wheels. 1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy. WARNING! Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.). 2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. 3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible. 4. Keep tires properly inflated. 5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 211 DRIVING THROUGH WATER Shallow Standing Water Driving through water more than a few inches/ Although your vehicle is capable of driving through centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure shallow standing water, consider the following Caution safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. and Warning before doing so. Flowing/Rising Water CAUTION! WARNING! Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. • Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it. Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle. • Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water. • Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. This will minimize wave effects. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 212 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) • Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., transmission, coolant, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes. • Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. (Continued) POWER STEERING The electric power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the electric steering system experiences a fault that I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 213 prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. ability to steer the vehicle manually. WARNING! Continued operation with reduced or no power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible. If the Steering icon, and the ⬙SERVICE POWER STEERING - ASSIST OFF⬙ message is displayed on the EVIC screen, the vehicle needs to be taken to an authorized dealer for service. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. If the Steering icon is flashing, it indicates that the vehicle NOTE: needs to be taken to an authorized dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. • Even if the power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. If the Steering icon is displayed and the “SERVICE Under these conditions there will be a substantial POWER STEERING” message is displayed on the EVIC increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and screen, they indicate that extreme steering maneuvers during parking maneuvers. may have occurred which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system. Once driving • If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for conditions are safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for service. a few moments until the icon and message turn off. Refer I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 214 STARTING AND OPERATING PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied. The parking brake lever is located in the center console. To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, push the center button, then lower the lever completely. Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. The parking brake I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 215 should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle. WARNING! • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission push buttons. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children). A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. WARNING! (Continued) • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision. • Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. CAUTION! If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 216 STARTING AND OPERATING All systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are comIn the event regenerative braking or power assist is lost monly referred to as ESC. for any reason the brakes will still function. The effort required to brake the vehicle will be significantly more Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) than that required with the power system operating. The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking concapability, the remaining system will still function with ditions. The system operates with a separate computer to some loss of braking effectiveness. This will be evident by modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces. force required to slow or stop, and activation of the Brake The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light during brake provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor use. makes a low humming noise during operation, which is BRAKE SYSTEM ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM normal. Your vehicle is equipped with a advanced electronic The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light. When brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake the light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction Con- system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning trol System (TCS), and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 217 the ignition Off and On again may reset the ABS if the fault detected was only momentary. WARNING! • Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop. • The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. • The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. When you are in a severe braking condition involving the use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the system reverting to the base brake system. Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise. These occurrences are normal and indicate that the system is functioning properly. Brake Assist System (BAS) The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 218 STARTING AND OPERATING system detects an emergency braking situation by sensWARNING! (Continued) ing the rate and amount of brake application and then • The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very • The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brakmanner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or ing pressure during the stopping sequence (do not the safety of others. “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal Traction Control System (TCS) is released, the BAS is deactivated. This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake WARNING! pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and vehicle • The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevail- Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip ing road conditions. differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 219 the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for further information. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. • Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position. • Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position. NOTE: The ESC Off switch is located on the instrument This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor- panel. rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by WARNING! applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteering or understeering condi- • The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pretion. Vehicle power may also be reduced to help the vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. accidents, including those resulting from excessive When the actual path does not match the intended path, speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: (Continued) 5 220 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. • Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the steering system, suspension, braking system, tire type and size or wheel size may adversely affect (Continued) ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. ESC Operating Modes The ESC system has two available operating modes. Full On This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in On mode. This mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC should only be turned to Partial Off for specific reasons as noted below. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 221 Partial Off WARNING! This mode is entered by momentarily pushing the ESC Off switch. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESC on again, momentarily pushing the switch again. This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation. • When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced. NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or ESC OFF Indicator Light gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pushing the switch. Once the situation requiring The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome, Light in the instrument cluster will come on turn ESC back on by momentarily pushing the switch. when the ignition switch is turned to the MAR This may be done while the vehicle is in motion. (ACC/ON/RUN) position for four seconds. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 222 STARTING AND OPERATING on continuously with the vehicle operating running, a NOTE: malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this • The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at each time the ignition switch is turned ON. speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously. diagnosed and corrected. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (located The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also off. flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during accel- Regenerative Braking System (RBS) eration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and Your 500e has a Regenerative Braking System driving to the prevailing road conditions. (RBS). The RBS reduces the high voltage battery consumption of the vehicle, particularly in stop-and-go city traffic. The electric motors I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 223 which propel the vehicle forward can operate as genera- TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION tors when braking. The RBS recharges the high voltage Tire Markings battery under certain braking conditions by recapturing energy that would otherwise be lost while braking. The electric power that is generated goes back into the high voltage battery for later use, for example when acceleration is desired. The RBS uses conventional hydraulic friction brakes, regenerative braking, or a combination to slow the vehicle. If the system detects slippery conditions while braking, ONLY friction is used to slow the vehicle. The RBS can result in extended life of the hydraulic service brakes; however, all inspection, scheduled maintenance, and service intervals for the vehicle service brakes must 1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards 4 — Maximum Load Code (TIN) be followed. 2 — Size Designation 3 — Service Description I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 — Maximum Pressure 6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades 5 224 STARTING AND OPERATING letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. NOTE: • P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” • Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary molded into the sidewall preceding the size designaemergency use only. Temporary high pressure comtion. Example: P215/65R15 95H. pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: • European — Metric tire sizing is based on European T145/80D18 103M. design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT. • LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 225 Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE: Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or T or S = Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) – Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) R = Construction code – ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or – ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 226 STARTING AND OPERATING EXAMPLE: Service Description: 95 = Load Index – A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol – A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions – The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire: • XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or • LL = Light load tire or • C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 227 Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire. with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Tire Identification Number (TIN) EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation – This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 228 STARTING AND OPERATING EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) – 03 means the 3rd week 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) – 01 means the year 2001 – Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 229 Tire Terminology And Definitions Term B-Pillar Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Maximum Inflation Pressure Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Tire Placard Definition The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 230 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar) Example Tire Placard Location (Door) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 231 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires. Tire And Loading Information Placard Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual. Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the: 1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle. 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual. To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 232 STARTING AND OPERATING is 650 lbs (294 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. (340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) = The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and 650 lbs [294 kg]). trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo the weight referenced here. being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit capacity calculated in step 4. 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or NOTE: XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard. • If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and ing table shows examples on how to calculate total passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pasvehicle with varying seating configurations and numsengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg. ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if and load carry capacity of your vehicle. “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will • For the following example, the combined weight of be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg). amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 233 5 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 234 STARTING AND OPERATING Safety WARNING! Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them. TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure: • Safety and Vehicle Stability WARNING! • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions. • Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure. • Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure. • Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle. • Energy Consumption (Continued) • Tread Wear • Ride Comfort I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 235 Energy Consumption WARNING! (Continued) • Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. • Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure. Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher battery charge consumption. Tread Wear Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability need for earlier tire replacement. of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability response or over responsiveness in the steering. Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. NOTE: Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable • Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause ride. erratic and unpredictable steering response. Tire Inflation Pressures • Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the vehicle to drift left or right. driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 236 STARTING AND OPERATING At least once a month: mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the • Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidepocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual wall. judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under- Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with inflated. temperature changes. • Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind CAUTION! when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, althe Winter. ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire which could damage the valve stem. inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure outside temperature condition. is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 237 Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low. Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation WARNING! High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle Radial Ply Tires loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original WARNING! equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operatCombining radial ply tires with other types of tires ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of tires. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 238 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Repair Tire Types If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it All Season Tires — If Equipped meets the following criteria: All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary • The tire has not been driven on when flat. between different all season tires. All season tires can be • The damage is only on the tread section of your tire identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on (sidewall damage is not repairable). the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; • The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm). failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information. Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol). Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 239 Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Snow Tires Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall. If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. WARNING! Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control. Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 240 STARTING AND OPERATING While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types. Run Flat Tires — If Equipped Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information. Spare Tires — If Equipped NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. CAUTION! Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited-use temporary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result. Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full Wheel — If Equipped capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and mode. wheel equivalent in look and function to the original I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 241 equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern. Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity. Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a wheel on the vehicle at any given time. compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on WARNING! the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spares are for temporary emergency use Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” only. With these spares, do not drive more than or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/ 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited 80D18 103M. tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be T, S = Temporary Spare Tire replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 242 STARTING AND OPERATING your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. first opportunity. This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare WARNING! tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Inspare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep first opportunity. inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on Full Size Spare — If Equipped Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 243 Tire Spinning Tread Wear Indicators When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or to help you in determining when your tires should be for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop- replaced. ping. Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 244 STARTING AND OPERATING worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further information. Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to: • Driving style. Tire Tread 1 — Worn Tire 2 — New Tire • Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement. • Distance driven. • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maingrooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth tenance schedule is highly recommended. becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 245 WARNING! Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a with oil, grease, and gasoline. wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match Replacement Tires those of the original wheels. The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 246 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle. • Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision. • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control. CAUTION! Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 247 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) CAUTION! Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against damage. • Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the traction device manufacturer • Install on Front Tires • Due to limited clearance, a 185/55R15 tire with a Security Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6 low profile traction device or equivalent is recommended WARNING! Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision. To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions: • Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is important that only chains in good condition are used. Broken chains can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use. • Install chains on the front wheels as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). • Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). • Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 248 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! (Continued) • Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement. • Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different from the speed recommended by the manufacture. • Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed. The front and rear wheels are different sizes and cannot be used in place of each other. Rotate the wheels “sideThe tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at to-side” as shown in the diagram. different loads and perform different steering, driving, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates. TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 249 Tire Rotation PREMIUM TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure. The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom- the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning mended cold placard pressure. limit for any reason, including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 250 STARTING AND OPERATING The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off. The system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. CAUTION! • The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warnings have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 251 CAUTION! (Continued) sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked. • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor. • The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure. • Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. • Under-inflation also reduces the high voltage battery range and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. • It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure. • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain NOTE: correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level • The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitorand maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire ing Telltale Light”. failure or condition. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 252 STARTING AND OPERATING • Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will the tire. illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the Premium TPM System four active road tires. In addition, the Electronic The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display a technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each the low tire pressure tire highlighted in a different wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure color. readings to the receiver module. The TPMS consists of the following components: • Receiver module • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors • Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 253 receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will sound a chime and also display a “Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System” message in the EVIC for approximately 5 seconds. Low Tire Indicator Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the system I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 254 STARTING AND OPERATING A system fault can occur due to any of the following: 1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors. 2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals. 3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings. 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. Service TPM System Message NOTE: If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault • The TPMS will not monitor the pressure in a replacement tire installed without a tire pressure sensor. no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will no longer flash, and the “Service TPM Sys- • If you install a replacement tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning tem” message will no longer display. limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain on and I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 255 a chime will sound. In addition, the highlighted warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The graphic in the EVIC will still display a low pressure vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above text message and a pressure value in a different color. 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. • After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring General Information Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the display a “Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System” following two conditions: message. (1) This device may not cause harmful interference. • For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” (2) This device must accept any interference received, will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on including interference that may cause undesired operation. solid, and the EVIC will display a “Service TPM NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved System” message. by the party responsible for compliance could void the Once you repair or replace the original road tire and user’s authority to operate the equipment. reinstall it, the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn TRAILER TOWING off, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 256 STARTING AND OPERATING RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Flat Tow Dolly Tow On Trailer Wheels OFF the Ground NONE Front Rear ALL NOTE: • When recreationally towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details. • This vehicle must be towed on a dolly or vehicle trailer with the front wheels OFF the ground. Single-Speed Transmission NOT ALLOWED OK NOT ALLOWED OK CAUTION! Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: STARTING AND OPERATING 257 EXTENDING YOUR DRIVING RANGE PER CHARGE temperature before the drive and allow the battery to maintain the temperature at significantly lower energy levels. The drive system and cabin temperature management features use the most energy from the high voltage Additional tips: battery. Reducing energy draw from these features are • Keep tires properly inflated the easiest and most effective way to extend driving range. • When practical, choose surface streets over the highway, and work to maintain a steady speed The 500e uses high voltage components to heat and cool the cabin, so when using automatic climate control, • Avoid carrying nonessential cargo consider setting temperatures a few degrees higher or • Be mindful of adding external accessories that may lower during hot and cold days. If your 500e has been increase aerodynamic drag soaking in hot or cold temperatures for an extended period, it is recommended that the car be preconditioned • Perform all scheduled maintenance at recommended using the Uconnect Access smartphone app while still intervals plugged into a charging source. This will allow 500e to Driver Behavior Gauge use external power to establish a comfortable cabin To help the driver extend the driving range of the high voltage battery your vehicle is equipped with a Driver I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 258 STARTING AND OPERATING Behavior Gauge. The Driver Behavior Gauge is located on the right side of the instrument cluster and contains three driving ranges: • Power The needle will move into the Power range when under acceleration. • ECO The needle will move into the ECO range when you are maximizing the driving range of the high voltage battery. • Charge The needle will move into the Charge range when battery regeneration is active (either coasting or braking). I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Driver Behavior Gauge STARTING AND OPERATING 259 • When both arrows are grey, expect the range to drop approximately one mile for each mile driven. This area of the cluster is used to display the projected range considering current battery charge and previous • When the up arrow is highlighted, expect the range energy use. The two arrows to the left of the mileage are number to hold steady or increase while driving. used to forecast the effect of recent driving. • When the down arrow is highlighted, expect the range number to decrease more than one mile for each mile driven. Range Projection Range Projection Indicators I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 5 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS 䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .262 䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE (12 VOLT BATTERY ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 ▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 ▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 ▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .264 䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 ▫ Tire Service Kit Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264 䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 ▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .265 䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .281 ▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . .266 ▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . .268 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 6 262 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any instrument panel below the radio. time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a flashers. When the switch is activated, all direc- properly calibrated torque wrench. tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to Torque Specifications turn off the Hazard Warning flashers. Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/ Do not use this emergency warning system when the Bolt Size Bolt Socket vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled Size and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. 17 mm 66 Ft-Lbs (90 N·m) Steel M12 x 1.25 Wheels Only If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the 74 Ft-Lbs (100 N·m) Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate with Aluminum Wheels Only the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked. NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers **Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before may wear down your battery. tightening. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 263 Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles. 6 Torque Patterns After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated Wheel Mounting Surface Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each against the wheel. nut/bolt has been tightened twice. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 264 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Tire Service Kit Storage WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. The Tire Service Kit is located in the rear cargo area. TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C). This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h). I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Tire Service Kit Location WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 265 Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Tire Service Kit Components And Operation Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode. Selecting Air Mode Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this position for air pump operation only. Use the Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode. Selecting Sealant Mode Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6) when selecting this mode. Tire Service Kit Components 1 2 3 4 — — — — Sealant Bottle Deflation Button Pressure Gauge Power Button 5 — Mode Select Knob 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear) 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black) 8 — Power Plug (located on the bottom side of the Tire Service Kit) Using The Power Button Push and release the Power Button (4) once to turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 6 266 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Using The Deflation Button Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated. Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions • Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”. Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location • The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one tire application use and need to be replaced after each use. Always replace these components immediately at your original equipment vehicle dealer. • When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form, clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 267 from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded. • For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire Service Kit. • You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle. • Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses. WARNING! • Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit. • Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances: – If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger. – If the tire has any sidewall damage. – If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure. – If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire. – If the wheel has any damage. – If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: (Continued) 6 268 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat source. • A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. • Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact with clothing. • Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately. (Continued) Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit (A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit: 1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s Hazard Warning flashers. 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 269 on the ground. This will provide the best positioning 4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated valve stem. tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position 5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the before proceeding. vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet. 3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or in Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition nails) from the tire. in the OFF position. (C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The 4. Set the parking brake. Deflated Tire: (B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit: • Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire Service Kit. 1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Sealant Mode position. NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the 2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL. from the fitting at the end of the hose. • After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white 3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire. deflated tire. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 6 270 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and tire. the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6). If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose (6): If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant Hose (6): 1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve 1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit. quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is 2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt empty. power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available. Make sure the engine is running before 2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediturning ON the Tire Service Kit. ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure 3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side use. Call for assistance. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 271 latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire 3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3). valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vepressure within 15 minutes: hicle.” • The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance. CAUTION! NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing. If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes: 1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service Kit. • The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get hot after use, so it should be handled carefully. • Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal Tire Service Kit components which may cause permanent damage to the kit. 2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument panel. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 6 272 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES (D) Drive Vehicle: (E) After Driving: Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing. distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire. 1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h). Mode position. WARNING! Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. 2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet. 3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve stem. 4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure Gauge (3). If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar): The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 273 If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher: 5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument panel after the tire has been repaired. 1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire 6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) and loading information label on the driver-side door assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as posopening. sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”. NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom- NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authomended inflation pressure before continuing. rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed using the Tire Service Kit. 2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 (F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement: Volt outlet. 1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color). 3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in 2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the the vehicle. recessed area under the sealant bottle. 4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the 3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose service center. of it accordingly. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 6 274 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. housing. 5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and the front of the housing. Push the bottle into the precautions. housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked into place. WARNING! 6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump). Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury. 7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the vehicle. CAUTION! JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE (12 VOLT BATTERY ONLY) If your vehicle has a discharged 12 Volt battery, it can be jump-started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, power electronics or electrical system may occur. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 275 Preparations For Jump-Start The battery in your vehicle is located in the underhood compartment under the beauty cover. To access the battery pull upward on the cover. 6 Battery Posts 1 — Positive (+) Post (Covered With Protective Cap) 2 — Negative (-) Post I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 276 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 3. Remove the protective cover over the positive (+) battery post. WARNING! • Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades. • Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured. • Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery. 1. Set the parking brake, place the transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK. 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories. 4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. WARNING! Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result. Jump-Starting Procedure WARNING! Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 277 CAUTION! Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle. 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle underhood compartment) away from the battery. WARNING! Connecting The Jumper Cables 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed metal parts. 3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster negative (-) post of the booster battery. battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then turn the key to RUN position on the vehicle with the discharged battery. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 6 278 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 6. Once the vehicle is started, remove the jumper cables FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE in the reverse sequence: If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the Disconnecting The Jumper Cables steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the 1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE engine ground (-) of the vehicle with the discharged and REVERSE while gently pushing the accelerator. Use battery. the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will 2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels. from the negative (-) post of the booster battery. 3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake 4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further inforfrom the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. mation. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle, Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode. you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 279 CAUTION! WARNING! (Continued) • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result. • Spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear. longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for MANUAL PARK RELEASE WARNING! Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking brake, before activating the Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the parking brake or other means. Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those in or around the vehicle. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 6 280 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery), a Manual Park Release is available. If a dead 12 volt battery is the cause of the condition refer to “Jump Start Procedure — 12 Volt Battery” before performing the Manual Park Release. To perform the Manual Park Release follow these steps: • To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintentionally, firmly apply the parking brake. • If possible, raise the front driver’s side of the vehicle to provide access to the transmission. Manual Park Release Location • Working from underneath the vehicle, remove the black • Reinstall the rubber plug. rubber plug from the front of the Park module (a black • Release the parking brake only when a driver is in the canister mounted on the front of the transmission). vehicle, or the vehicle is secured by other means. The • Using a T25 driver bit, rotate the Manual Park Release Manual Park Release will be reset automatically once shaft (located just behind the rubber plug) clockwise, the vehicle is restarted. at least 20 turns, to release the Park mechanism. The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be moved. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 281 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. Towing Condition Flat Tow Wheel Lift Flatbed Wheels OFF The Ground NONE Rear Front ALL 6 This vehicle must be towed with the front wheels OFF the ground. If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN position. If the ignition key is unavailable, or the battery is discharged, see “Manual Park Release” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK in order to move the vehicle. SINGLE-SPEED TRANSMISSION NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED OK OK CAUTION! • Do not use sling-type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur. • When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 䡵 UNDERHOOD COMPARTMENT . . . . . . . . . . .285 ▫ Selection Of Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 ▫ Adding Coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 ▫ Power Electronics and Battery Thermal Management Systems — Drain, Flush And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .286 ▫ Power Electronics And Battery Thermal Management Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 ▫ Power Electronics and Battery Thermal Management Systems — Coolant Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 ▫ Power Electronics and Battery Thermal Management Systems — Cooling Pressure Caps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 ▫ Disposal Of Used Power Electronics and Battery Thermal Management Systems Coolant . . . . . .293 ▫ Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 ▫ Maintenance-Free Battery 12 Volt . . . . . . . . . .294 ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 ▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 284 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 ▫ Headlamps Low Beam and High Beam . . . . . .318 ▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 ▫ Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime Running Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 ▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 ▫ Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 ▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 ▫ Power Distribution Center #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 ▫ Power Distribution Center (PDC) #2 . . . . . . . .315 䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 ▫ Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 ▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . .319 ▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 ▫ Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL). . .320 䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 䡵 FLUIDS, LUBES, AND GENUINE PARTS . . . . .321 䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 285 UNDERHOOD COMPARTMENT 7 1 — Battery Thermal Coolant Reservoir 2 — Power Electronics Coolant Reservoir 3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 4 — Fuses 5 — 12V Battery I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 286 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil Use of genuine parts for normal/scheduled maintenance penalties being assessed against you. and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the WARNING! use of parts which are not quality-equivalent to genuine parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by You can be badly injured working on or around a the manufacturer’s warranty. motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you REPLACEMENT PARTS DEALER SERVICE have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself. WARNING! Your vehicle has both a high voltage DC and AC system as well as a 12 Volt system. DC and AC high I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: (Continued) MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 287 WARNING! (Continued) voltage are both extremely dangerous and can cause severe burns, electric shock, serious injury or even death. In order to avoid personal injuries: • DO NOT TOUCH THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES (ORANGE COLORED) AND/OR THE CONNECTORS. • Follow all Caution and Warning labels attached to the High Voltage components. • Do not remove or replace any of the 500e System components. All replacement or repairs of 500e System components should be performed by a factory-trained technician at an authorized dealer. The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle. Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule, there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future. CAUTION! • Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs, damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center. • Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage them. Such I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: (Continued) 7 288 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! (Continued) damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure. temperature, the level of the coolant (antifreeze) in the bottles should be between the bottom and top lines marked “MIN-MAX FILL RANGE”. Power Electronics And Battery Thermal Management Systems The Power Electronics and Battery Thermal Management Systems are completely separate and designed to regulate temperature for the high voltage battery and the electric components. Power Electronics and Battery Thermal Management Systems — Coolant Level Check Coolant MIN/MAX The coolant expansion bottles provides a quick visual As long as the vehicle operating temperature is satisfacmethod for determining that the coolant level is ad- tory, the coolant bottles need only be checked once a equate. With the vehicle off and coolant at ambient month. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 289 When additional coolant (antifreeze) is needed to main- Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumutain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant lation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the bottles. Do not overfill. face of the condenser. Check the Power Electronics and Battery Thermal Management Systems coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 NOTE: DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE months (before the onset of freezing weather, where CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT. applicable). Maintain coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a minimum of 50% MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/ 150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) and distilled/deionized water for proper corrosion protection. Check the coolant bottles tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottles and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 290 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot. Power Electronics and Battery Thermal Management Systems — Cooling Pressure Caps The caps must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant (antifreeze). The caps should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. NOTE: WARNING! You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or (Continued) • The pressure caps on the reservoirs are unique and rated at 5 PSI caps. • Use only MOPAR replacement parts. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 291 WARNING! CAUTION! • The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add coolant (antifreeze) when the cooling system is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated cooling system. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure. • Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or vehicle damage may result. • Mixing of coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (antifreeze), may result in cooling system damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) coolant (antifreeze). If a nonOAT coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, it should be replaced with the specified coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible. • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator coolant and may plug the radiator. Selection Of Coolant Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: (Continued) 7 292 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE When adding coolant (antifreeze): CAUTION! (Continued) • This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended. • The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology). • Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT coolant (antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentrations Adding Coolant (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34ºF (-37ºC) Your vehicle has been built with cooling systems that are anticipated. allow extended maintenance intervals. This coolant (an• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deiontifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles ized water when mixing the water and coolant (anti(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing freeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will this extended maintenance period, it is important that reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the you use the same coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life cooling systems. of your vehicle. Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainPlease review these recommendations for using Organic tain the proper level of protection against freezing acAdditive Technology (OAT) coolant (antifreeze). cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 293 NOTE: Mixing coolant (antifreeze) types will decrease the life of the Power Electronics and Battery Thermal Management Systems coolant (antifreeze) and will require more frequent coolant (antifreeze) changes. Power Electronics and Battery Thermal Management Systems — Drain, Flush And Refill CAUTION! It is recommended to have the cooling systems serviced at your authorized dealer. Failure to do so could result in poor cooling system performance and/or vehicle damage. Refer to “Maintenance Schedules” in Section 7 of this Disposal Of Used Power Electronics and Battery Thermal Management Systems Coolant supplement for the proper maintenance intervals. If the coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old coolant (antifreeze) solution. Used antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 294 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE • Make sure that the coolant control systems recovery bottles overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed. Points To Remember If an examination of your underhood compartment shows no evidence of cooler or hose leaks, the vehicle • Keep the front of the coolant control systems clean. If may be safely driven. your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean. • Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottles. Maintenance-Free Battery 12 Volt • Check coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the coolant recovery bottles. If coolant (antifreeze) needs to be Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free 12 Volt added, contents of coolant recovery bottles must also battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required. be protected against freezing. • If frequent coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottles does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks. • Maintain coolant (antifreeze) concentration at 50% OAT coolant (antifreeze) (minimum) and distilled/ deionized water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components. WARNING! • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: (Continued) MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 295 WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other. • Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. • The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type (vented). • It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion. • If a 12 Volt Low Voltage Battery System “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 296 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE include cleaning of the condenser fins and air conditioning performance tests. CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. WARNING! (Continued) Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD, for further warranty information. • The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician. Body Lubrication WARNING! • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to (Continued) Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 297 lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and help reduce streaking and smearing. Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield or rear window. Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield or rear window. Make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products. NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 298 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully upward unless the pivot cap is raised first. 1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the 2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper liftgate glass. blade off of the liftgate glass. 3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade holder. 1 — Wiper Arm 2 — Pivot Cap I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 299 5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into place. Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the underhood compartment, and the fluid level should be checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not coolant/ antifreeze). Refer to “Underhood Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. WARNING! 1 2 3 4 — — — — Wiper Blade Blade Pivot Pin Wiper Arm Wiper Blade Holder Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution. 4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press the wiper blade until it snaps into place. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 300 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Brake System Brake Master Cylinder In order to assure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services, or immediately if the “Brake Warning Light” is on and the parking brake is not applied. WARNING! Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. Riding the brakes may also reduce braking capacity in an emergency. Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed. NOTE: Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 301 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir. • To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision. • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot vehicle parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. • Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in a collision. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 302 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch function and the ability to shift the transmission. hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection. The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle. What Causes Corrosion? Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle. The most common causes are: • Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. • Stone and gravel impact. • Insects, tree sap and tar. • Salt in the air near seacoast localities. • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 303 Washing • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water. • If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove. CAUTION! • Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces. • Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. • Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR Special Care Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint. near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month. • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 304 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, Wheel And Wheel Trim Care touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is • All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and considered the responsibility of the owner. chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly • If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, • To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The MOPAR Wheel Cleaner. cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner. NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or • If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covpackaged and sealed. ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY • If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used mud or stone shields behind each wheel. on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain • Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as this finish. possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 305 CAUTION! Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. • For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. • For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. • Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products. Interior Care Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If Equipped Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man- carpeting. ner: Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for with a clean, dry towel. leather upholstery. • Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 306 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition. CAUTION! Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately. CAUTION! Damage caused by these type of products may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. WARNING! CAUTION! Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as damage to the seat may result. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 307 equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements. Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore directly on the mirror. different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. Instrument Panel Cover To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol- minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesirlowed by rinsing. able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel low glare surface. wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses. Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or windows I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 308 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2. Dry with a soft cloth. Instrument Panel Bezels Seat Belt Maintenance CAUTION! When installing hanging air fresheners in your vehicle, read the installation instructions carefully. Some air fresheners will damage the finish of painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly contact any surface. Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth. Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are buckles do not work properly. molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. WARNING! 1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp cloth. A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 309 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). • Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged. • If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer. • If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, gearbox system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer. FUSES WARNING! • When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 310 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Interior Fuses The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control Module (BCM) and is located on the driver’s side under the instrument panel. 1 Vehicle Fuse Number F12 2 F32 3 F53 4 F38 5 F36 Cavity Fuse Panel I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Mini Fuse 7.5 Amp Brown 5 Amp Tan 5 Amp Tan 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red Description Right Low Beam Front and Rear Ceiling Lights Trunk and Door Courtesy Lights Instrument Panel Node Central Door Locking Diagnostic Socket, Climate Control System, Tire Pressure Monitor, TCU MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 311 6 Vehicle Fuse Number F43 7 F48 Cavity 8 F13 9 F50 10 F51 Mini Fuse 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 7.5 Amp Brown 7.5 Amp Brown 5 Amp Tan Description Cavity Bi-Directional Washer 11 Vehicle Fuse Number F37 Passenger Power Window Left Low Beam 12 F49 5 Amp Tan Airbag 13 F31 Climate Control System, Stop Light, Exterior Mirrors, Sunroof Switch 14 5 Amp Tan 20 Amp Yellow F47 Mini Fuse 5 Amp Tan Description Stop Light Switch, Instrument Panel Node Exterior Mirror, Electric Mirror, Parking Sensor, Sunroof Switch Ignition, Climate Control, RDU and EVCU Driver Power Window The fuse for the heated mirrors is located behind an access panel on the front of the Instrument Panel. NOTE: This fuse is a single fuse attached directly to the wire harness. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Power Distribution Center #1 The Power Distribution Center #1 is located on the right side of the underhood compartment. To access the fuses, remove locking screw and slide cover off. F90 Fuse Location 1 — Heated Mirror Fuse Cavity F90 2 — Access Panel Mini Fuse 5 Amp Tan Description Heated Mirrors I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Front Distribution Unit MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313 The ID number of the electrical component corresponding to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover. Cavity F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 Maxi Fuse 60 Amp Blue 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 40 Amp Orange 70 Amp Tan 60 Amp Blue F08 – Body Control Module (BCM) Audio Amplifier F09 Maxi Fuse 40 Amp Orange 40 Amp Orange – – Ignition Switch F10 – – Brake System Module Pump Electric Power Steering (EPS) Radiator Fan F11 – F14 – F15 – Cavity F07 Mini Fuse – – – Description I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Mini Fuse – – 5 Amp Tan 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 5 Amp Tan 15 Amp Blue Description Regen Brake Module HVAC Air Electric Heater Charge Indicator Horn Electronic Vehicle Control Unit (EVCU) High Beam (Shutter) Cigar Lighter, AUX Power Outlet 7 314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE F16 Maxi Fuse – F18 – Cavity F19 – F20 – F21 – F23 – Mini Fuse 10 Amp Red 5 Amp Tan 10 Amp Red 15 Amp Blue 20 Amp Yellow 25 Amp Clear Humidity Sensor VPAM AC Compressor Electronic Vehicle Control Unit (EVCU) HVAC F24 Maxi Fuse – F30 – F81 Heated Seats – If Equipped Radio F84 30 Amp Green 30 Amp Green – Anti-Lock Brake Valves F87 Description Cavity F82 F85 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 30 Amp Green – Mini Fuse 7.5 Amp Brown 15 Amp Blue – – 25 Amp Clear – 5 Amp Tan Description EPS YAW Sensor Fog Lamps Electronic Shifter (ESM) Sunroof Regen Brake Module Rear Window Heater Electronic Shifter (ESM) MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 315 Power Distribution Center (PDC) #2 Cavity The Power Distribution Center #2 is located next to the battery in the underhood compartment. To access the fuses, pull the release tabs and remove the cover. PDC #2 Mini Fuse Description FPT9 Maxi Fuse – 15 Amp Blue FPT13 – 10 Amp Red FPT16 – FPT17 – 5 Amp Tan 10 Amp Red FPT20 – Battery Pack Control Module (BPCM) Power Inverter Module (PIM) EAC (AC Compressor) On Board Charging Module (OBCM) Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS) EAC (AC Compressor) Radiator Fan Electronic Vehicle Control Unit (EVCU) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 10 Amp Red 7 316 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity FPT3 Cartridge Fuse 25 Amp White FPT5 20 Amp Lt. Blue FPT6 40 Amp Green Description Battery Coolant Pump Inverter Coolant Pump Supply for fuses F9, F13, F16, F17 and F20 VEHICLE STORAGE Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the air conditioning system is started again. REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Bulbs The preferred way of storing your vehicle for a long period of time is to leave it attached to a Level 1 or Level 2 charger. The vehicle has a wake-up feature that will wake the system every 3 weeks and do a maintenance charge on the 12 Volt battery and also top off the high voltage battery if necessary. Overhead Lamp Courtesy Lamp I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Bulb Number C5W W5W MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 317 Exterior Bulbs Front Low and High Beam Headlamp Front Parking/Daytime Running Lamps Front Fog Lamps Front Side Marker Lamps Front Turn Signal Lamps Side Direction Lamps Rear Turn Signal Lamps Rear Side Marker Lamps Rear Tail and Stop Lamps Rear Backup Lamps Bulb Number HIR2LL Center High Mounted Stop Lamp License Plate Lamps W21/5W H11LL W3W WY21W WY5W PY21W W3W P21/5W W16W Bulb Number LED (See Authorized dealer) LED (See Authorized dealer) NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual. BULB REPLACEMENT NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 318 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Headlamps Low Beam and High Beam 1. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the headlamp housing. 2. Rotate the bulb counter-clockwise. 3. Remove the bulb and replace as needed. 4. Install the bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in place. 5. Reinstall the plastic cap. Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime Running Lamps 1. Turn the steering wheel completely to the left or right. 2. Open the wheel housing access door. Wheel Housing Access Door 3. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the lamp housing. 4. Rotate bulb/socket counter-clockwise. 5. Remove the bulb and replace as needed. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 319 6. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/socket Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps clockwise into lamp locking it in place. 1. Open the liftgate. 7. Reinstall the plastic cap. 2. Remove the two screws and remove the tail lamp Front Fog Lamps assembly. To replace the front fog lights, see your authorized dealer. Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps 1. Remove portion of the wheel liner to allow hand access to side marker lamp. 7 2. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise, and remove the bulb and socket assembly from the housing. 3. Pull the bulb from the socket and insert the replacement bulb. 4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing, and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place. 5. Reinstall the wheel liner. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Tail Lamp Assembly Screws 320 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3. Remove four screws and separate the backplate from 2. the lamp housing. 3. 4. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs by pushing 4. them slightly and turning counter-clockwise. 5. 5. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight out. 6. 6. Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp. Remove the center high mounted stop lamp assembly. Disconnect the electric connector. Remove the two screws. Replace the CHMSL assembly. Reinstall the two screws. Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) 1. Remove the two guard caps and the two fastening screws. FLUID CAPACITIES Systems Power Electronics Cooling System Battery Thermal Management Cooling System Single-Speed Transmission U.S. 3.6 Quarts 7.0 Quarts 0.8 Quart I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Metric 3.5 Liters 6.7 Liters 750 ml MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 321 FLUIDS, LUBES, AND GENUINE PARTS Component Coolant Brake Master Cylinder Refrigerant Compressor Lubricant Single-Speed Transmission Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. MOPAR DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids or equivalent. MOPAR R134a MOPAR POE Oil or Equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12727 Castrol BOT 533 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 7 322 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) • Mixing of coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (antifreeze), may result in cooling system damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) coolant (antifreeze). If a nonOAT coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, it should be replaced with the specified coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible. • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator coolant and may plug the radiator. • This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended. (Continued) I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS 䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 ▫ Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 8 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 324 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE • Once A Month Or Before A Trip: • Check windshield washer fluid level • Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoirs and brake master cylinder • Check function of all interior and exterior lights • • • At Every Service Interval: Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear. Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses. Inspect battery cooling system protection and hoses. Check and adjust hand brake. Maintenance Chart Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals. page for the required maintenance intervals. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Additional Inspections Inspect the CV joints. Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, and replace if necessary. Inspect the brake linings. Replace as necessary. Inspect parking brake function. Adjust as necessary. 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Or Years: Or Kilometers: 20,000 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 32,000 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 325 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 8 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Additional Maintenance Replace cabin air filter. Clean and lube sun roof tracks. Flush and replace the Power Electronics and Battery Thermal Loop Systems at 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first. 2 48,000 Or Years: Or Kilometers: 20,000 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 32,000 326 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: X MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 327 WARNING! • You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. • Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident. 8 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS 䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 ▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .331 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 ▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .334 ▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .335 䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 ▫ FIAT Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 ▫ FIAT Canada Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .332 ▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 ▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . . . . . . . .333 ▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 ▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .335 䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . .337 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 9 330 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337 ▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 331 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment. If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE current problem. The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally Prepare A List interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services. specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an service advisor know. authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 9 332 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed • Vehicle delivery date and mileage correctly and in a timely manner. FIAT Customer Center This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 Phone: 1-888-242-6342 solved with this process. • If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the FIAT Canada Customer Center general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: 1-800They want to know if you need assistance. 465-2001 (English) Phone: 1-800-387-9983 (French) • If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, In Mexico Contact you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center. Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenSante Fe C.P. 05109 ter should include the following information: • Owner’s name and address Mexico, D. F. • Owner’s telephone number (home and office) In Mexico City: 5081-7568 • Authorized dealer name Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 333 San Juan 00919-1857 Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator. Tel.: (787) 782-5757 Service Contract Fax: (787) 782-3345 You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French). Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC P.O. Box 191857 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 9 334 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents. We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns. WARNING! Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only), some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA USA LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 335 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer. In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/ investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorized To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Masdealer, and the manufacturer. tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are acTo contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153), for an order form. or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West NOTE: A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes). Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 9 336 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Service Manuals Owner’s Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA USA LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts. These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA USA LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips. Diagnostic Procedure Manuals 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment. 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) • Call toll free at: Or • Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: www.techauthority.com I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 337 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate. The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The Traction Grades specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on your vehicle. wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforsafety requirements in addition to these grades. mance. Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart WARNING! The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 9 338 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Temperature Grades WARNING! The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law. The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: INDEX 10 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 340 INDEX Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Air Bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57, 58 Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58, 59 Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57, 58 If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Air Bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68, 91, 144 Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Air Conditioning System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190, 295 Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 Alarm Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Vehicle Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . .150, 156, 157, 159 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 Audio Systems (Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Automatic Dimming Mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .190 Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149, 294 Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .37 Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: INDEX 341 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316, 317 Bulbs, Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93, 316 Capacities, Fluid . . . Cargo Area Features Car Washes . . . . . . Cellular Phone . . . . Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 .134 .303 .188 .225 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Child Restraints Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . .84 Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint . . . .83 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .78 Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .74 Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Cleaning Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 10 342 INDEX Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 Connector UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . .170 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 Cooling System Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147, 149, 161, 162 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Disarming, Security System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148, 150 Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148, 150 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Electric Remote Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Electronic Brake Control System Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .118 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .164 Emergency, In Case Of Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: INDEX 343 Hazard Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Flashers Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93, 161 Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .321 Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 General Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 10 344 INDEX .307 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93, 109 Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68, 91, 144 .308 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 .305 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 .112 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147, 149, 161, 162 Key Fob Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110, 160 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93, 110, 161 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .161 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 Loading Vehicle Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93, 316 Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: INDEX 345 Locks Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .5, 335 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .231 Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .129 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 10 346 INDEX Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Radio Frequency General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34, 39 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Rear Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Seat Belt Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .187 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Pretensioners Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: INDEX 347 Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46, 91 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46, 48, 50 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Security Alarm Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93, 110, 161 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240, 241, 242 Speed Control Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 Steering Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 10 348 INDEX Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .187 Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag . . . . . . . . .58 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .190 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . .230, 231 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93, 234, 240, 337 Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234, 240 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230, 231 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223, 234 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240, 242 Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Tire Service Kit . . . . . . .264, 265, 266, 268, 269, 272, 273 To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: INDEX 349 Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .256 Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Transaxle Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Transmission Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110, 161 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Vehicle Vehicle Vehicle Vehicle Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Security Alarm Disarming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 116 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 Water Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43, 128 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .170 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 10 350 INDEX Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 116 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation. The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection should not be fused. Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped. The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable. Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions. All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s electronic systems. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: 16BEV24-126-AB 16BEV24-126-AA ©2015 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. FIAT is a registered trademark of Fiat Group Marketing & Corporate Communication S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC. I nf or mat i onPr ovi dedby: Second First Edition Edition Printed in U.S.A.